Home

Model 42i - User Manual

1. Register Number Variable 40005 amp 40006 NOx 40007 amp 40008 NOT USED 40009 amp 40010 NOT USED 40011 amp 40012 LOW NO 40013 amp 40014 LOW N02 40015 amp 40016 LOW NOx 40017 amp 40018 NOT USED 40019 amp 40020 NOT USED 40021 amp 40022 HIGH NO 40023 amp 40024 HIGH N02 400258 40026 HIGH NOx 40027840028 NOT USED 40029840030 NOT USED 400318 40032 RANGE NOx 400338 40034 NOT USED 400358 40036 INTERNAL TEMPERATURE 40037840038 CHAMBER TEMPERATURE 40039840040 COOLER TEMPERATURE 400418 40042 NO2 CONVERTER TEMP 40043 amp 40044 NOT USED 40045 amp 40046 PERM OVEN GAS 40047 amp 40048 PERM OVEN HEATER 40049 amp 40050 CHAMBER PRESSURE 40051 amp 40052 SAMPLE FLOW 400538 40054 PMT VOLTS 400558 40056 ANALOG IN 1 40057 amp 40058 ANALOG IN 2 40059 amp 40060 ANALOG IN 3 40061 amp 40062 ANALOG IN 4 40063 amp 40064 ANALOG IN 5 40065 amp 40066 ANALOG IN 6 40067 amp 40068 ANALOG IN 7 40069 amp 40070 ANALOG IN 8 40071 amp 40072 OZONATOR FLOW Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported Register Number Variable 40073840074 NOT USED 40075840076 NOT USED 40077840078 NOT USED 40079840080 NO CORRECTION CONC 40081840082 NO2 CORRECTION CONC 40083 amp 40084 NOx CORRECTION CONC 40085 amp 40086 NOT USED 40087840088 NOT USED 40089840090 LOW NO CORRECTION CONC 40
2. Commands Command Description Page copy stream to sp Sets copies current streaming data selection into the scratch B 24 pad custom Reports sets defined custom range concentration B 32 data treatment Irec Reports sets data treatment for concentrations values in long B 18 records data treatment srec Reports sets data treatment for concentrations values in B 18 short records date Reports sets current date B 36 default params Sets parameters to default values B 37 dhcp Reports sets state of use of DHCP B 40 diag volt ob Reports diagnostic voltage level for I O expansion board B 17 diag volt mb Reports diagnostic voltage level for motherboard B 17 diag volt mib Reports diagnostic voltage level for measurement interface B 17 board dig in Reports status of the digital inputs B 44 din Reports sets digital input channel and active state B 44 do down Simulates pressing down pushbutton B 29 dout Reports sets digital output channel and active state B 44 dtoa Reports outputs of the digital to analog converters per B 45 channel en enter Simulates pressing enter pushbutton B 29 er Returns a brief description of the main operating conditions B 19 in the format specified in the commands erec Returns a brief description of the main operating conditions B 19 in the format specified in the command erec format Reports sets erec format ASCII or binary B 21 erec layout Reports current layout of ere
3. Output Zero Value Full Scale 100 Value NO Zero 0 Range Setting NO Zero 0 Range Setting NO Zero 0 Range Setting LO NO Zero 0 Range Setting LO NO Zero 0 Range Setting LO NO Zero 0 Range Setting HI NO Zero 0 Range Setting HI NO Zero 0 Range Setting HI NO Zero 0 Range Setting Range NO Recommend not to change the setting for this output Internal Temp Chamber Temp User set alarm min value User set alarm max value User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Cooler Temp User set alarm min value User set alarm max value NO Converter Temp User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Perm Oven Gas Temp Perm Oven Gas alarm min value Perm Oven Gas alarm max value Perm Oven Heater Temp Perm Oven Heater alarm min Perm Oven Heater alarm max value value Chamber Pressure User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Flow User set alarm min value User set alarm max value PMT Volts 700 volts 1100 volts Ozonator Flow User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Everything Else 0 Units 10 Units Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 49 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Choose Signal to Output The Choose Signal to Output screen displays a submenu list of the analog output signal group choices Group choices are Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board option is installed
4. Soft Keys The Soft Keys are multi functional keys that use part of the display to identify their function at any moment The function of the soft keys allows immediate access to the menu structure and most often used menus and screens They are located directly underneath the display and as the keys functions change this is indicated by user defined labels in the lower part of the display so that the user knows what the keys are to be used for 9 To change a soft key place the menu cursor gt on the item of the selected menu or screen you wish to set Press gt followed by the selected soft key within 1 second of pressing the right arrow key The edit soft key prompt will be displayed for configuration for the new label Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 3 Operation Software Overview Software Overview 3 4 Model 42 Instruction Manual Note Not all menu items may be assigned to soft keys If a particular menu or screen item cannot be assigned the key assignment screen will not come up upon entering right arrow soft key combinations All items under the Service menu including the menu itself cannot be assigned soft keys A The Model 4217 utilizes the menu driven software as illustrated by the flowchart in Figure 3 3 The Power Up screen shown at the top of the flowchart is displayed each time the instrument is turned on This screen is displayed while the instrument is wa
5. Ozonator Assembly Side View Figure 7 12 Replacing the Ozonator Assembly 5 Remove the two screws securing the ozonator to the ozonator bracket 6 Unplug the ozonator from the ozonator transformer by lifting the ozonator straight up 7 To install the ozonator follow the previous steps in reverse 7 22 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Ozonator Transformer Replacement Input Board Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Ozonator Transformer Replacement 8 Re install the measurement bench Refer to Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter Use the following procedure to replace the ozonator transformer Figure 7 12 Equipment Required Ozonator transformer Philips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the ozonator assembly as described in Ozonator Assembly Replacement 3 Disconnect the plug connecting the ozonator transformer to the measurement interface board OZONATOR connector 4 Remove the four screws holding the ozonator transformer to the ozonator bracket and remove the ozonator transformer 5 To install the ozonator transformer follow the previous step
6. x 100 URL Nominal upper range limit of the NO channel ppm 5 Record the NO concentration and the analyzer s NO response Use the following procedures to prepare the NO NO and NO calibration curves Generate several additional NO and NOx concentrations by decreasing FNO or increasing FD For each concentration generated calculate the exact NO and NOx concentrations using the above equations for NO our and NO Jour Model 42 Instruction Manual 4 13 Calibration Calibration 4 14 Model 42 Instruction Manual 10 Record the NO and NO responses Plot the analyzer responses versus the respective calculated NO and NO concentrations and draw or calculate the respective calibration curves For subsequent calibrations where linearity can be assumed these curves may be checked with a three point calibration consisting of a zero point NO and NO concentrations of approximately 80 of the URL and an intermediate concentration Adjust the GPT system to generate a NO concentration near 90 of the URL of the instrument range selected Sample this NO concentration until the NO and NO responses have stabilized then measure and record the NO concentration as NO onric Adjust the Oz generator in the GPT system to generate sufficient Oz to produce a decrease in the NO concentration equivalent to about 80 of the URL of the NO range The decrease must not exceed 90 of the NO concentration determined in S
7. Serial Slave Address Function Code Data Error Check TCP IP MBAP Header Function Code Data The MODBUS save address is a single byte in length This is the same as the instrument ID used for C Link commands and can be between 1 and 127 decimal i e 0x01 hex to 0x7F hex This address is only used for MODBUS RTU over serial connections Note Device ID 0 used for broadcast MODBUS commands is not supported Device Ds 128 through 247 i e 0x80 hex to OxF7 hex are not supported because of limitations imposed by C Link A In MODBUS over TCP IP a MODBUS Application Protocol Header MBAP is used to identify the message This header consists of the following components Transaction Identifier 2 Bytes 0x0000 to OxFFFF Passed back in response Protocol Identifier 2 Bytes 0x00 MODBUS protocol Length 2 Bytes 0x0000 to OxFFFF Number of following bytes Unit Identifier 1 Byte 0x00 to OxFF Passed back in response Thermo Fisher Scientific Function Code Data Error Check Function Codes 0x01 0x02 Read Coils Thermo Fisher Scientific Read Inputs MODBUS Protocol Function Codes A Slave address is not required in MODBUS over TCP IP because the higher level protocols include device addressing The unit identifier is not used by the instrument The function code is a single byte in length The following function codes are supported by the instrument Read Coils 0x01 Read I
8. 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 This command sets the instrument baud rate The example below sets the instrument s baud rate to 9600 Note After the command is sent the baud rate of the sending device must be changed to agree with the instrument A Send set baud 9600 Receive set baud 9600 ok dhcp This command reports the current state of use of DHCP on or off DHCP is used to assign an IP address to the analyzer automatically The example below shows that DHCP is on Send dhcp Receive dhcp on set dhcp onoff These commands enables and disables the DHCP service by either on or off Changes to this parameter will only take effect when the analyzer is powered up The example below sets the DHCP service on Note When DHCP is set to on the user supplied addr gw addr dns addr ip and addr nm parameters are not used A Send set dhcp on Receive set dhcp on ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration format This command reports the current reply termination format The example below shows that the reply format is 00 which means reply with no checksum according to Table B 9 Send format Receive format 00 set format format This command sets the reply termination format where format is set according to Table B 9 The example below sets the reply termination format to checksum Send set format 01 Receive se
9. Connecting Several components are available for connecting external devices to Series External Devices instruments These connection options include e Individual terminal board PCB assemblies e Terminal block and cable kits optional e Individual cables optional For detailed information on the optional connection components refer to the Optional Equipment chapter For associated part numbers refer to External Device Connection Components on page 7 6 Terminal Board PCB The following terminal board PCB assemblies are available for Series Assembl les instruments e I O terminal board PCB assembly 37 pin standard e D O terminal board PCB assembly 37 pin standard e 25 pin terminal board PCB assembly included with optional I O Expansion Board 1 0 Terminal Board Figure 2 5 shows the recommended method for attaching the cable to the terminal board using the included tie down and spacer Table 2 1 identifies the connector pins and associated signals Note All of the I O available in the instrument are not brought out on this terminal board if more I O is desired an alternative means of connection is required A Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 2 5 Installation Connecting External Devices See Detail A 2 6 Model 42 Instruction Manual See Detail B Assembled Connector Detail A Figure 2 5 0 Terminal Board Views Table 2 1 1 0 Terminal Boa
10. Flow Transducer Use the following procedure to replace the flow transducer Figure 7 21 Re p lacement Equipment Required Flow transducer Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 7 41 Servicing Flow Transducer Calibration 2 Disconnect the plumbing connections from the flow transducer Note the plumbing connections to facilitate reconnection Flow Transducer Retaining Nuts Figure 7 21 Replacing the Flow Transducer 3 Disconnect the flow transducer cable from the measurement interface board 4 Loosen the two retaining nuts securing the flow transducer to the ozonator bracket and remove the flow transducer 5 To install the flow transducer follow previous steps in reverse 6 Calibrate the flow transducer Refer to the Flow Transducer Calibration procedure that follows Flow Transducer Use the following procedure to calibrate the flow transducer Calibration Equipment Required Calibrated flow sensor WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives 4 7 42 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Flow Transducer Cal
11. Pump Replacement in the Servicing chapter Equipment Required Pump Repair Kit Allen Wrench 3 mm Wrench 9 16 inch Needlenose Pliers Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing chapter A 1 Turn instrument off unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Loosen fittings and remove both lines going to the pump 3 To ensure proper reassembly mark the position of the pump head by using a pencil or other marker to draw a line from the top plate down across the bottom plate to the pump body Refer to this reference line when reassembling the pump head Model 42 Instruction Manual 5 5 Preventive Maintenance Pump Rebuilding 4 Remove four screws from top plate using the 3 mm Allen wrench 5 Remove top plate flapper valve and bottom plate 6 Using needlenose pliers remove clamping disk holding diaphragm and Teflon protection wafer onto clamping rod and remove the diaphragm and Teflon wafer 5 6 Model 427 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Pump Rebuilding gt lt Top Plate Screws 4 lt lop Plate e Clamping Disk I lt Teflon Protection Wafer Figure 5 3 Rebuilding the Pump 7 Assem
12. The Analog Inputs screen allows the user to select the analog input signal none or analog inputs 1 8 that is tied to the selected streaming data item The selected item is shown by lt after it e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Select Item gt Analog Inputs DH pikari AA The RS 232 RS 485 Selection screen allows the user to choose between the RS 232 or RS 485 specification for serial communication Note Disconnect the serial cable before changing RS 232 and RS 485 selection to prevent damage to the connected equipment A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt RS 232 RS 485 Selection Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu CH Pa THe mH miei PREP ED CHA PTT pmp ithe ETEO had Haat ake POE a ee Pi EE EE Hi a E B L PEYI Bet ho peins Poike reiini i TCP IP Settings The TCP IP Settings menu is used for defining TCP IP settings Note The instrument power must be cycled after any of these parameters have been changed for the change to take effect A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings PA a Ea Bebb CH mee Use DHCP The Use DHCP screen is used to specify whether to use DHCP or not When DHCP is enabled the network dynamically provides an IP address for the instrument e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrumen
13. About This Manual Safety Safety Safety and Equipment Damage Alerts Model 42 Instruction Manual e Appendix C MODBUS Protocol provides a description of the MODBUS Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 RTU protocol as well as TCP IP over Ethernet e Appendix D Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol provides a description of the Geysitech Bayern Hessen or BH Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 as well as TCP IP over Ethernet Review the following safety information carefully before using the analyzer This manual provides specific information on how to operate the analyzer however if the calibrator is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired This manual contains important information to alert you to potential safety hazards and risks of equipment damage Refer to the following types of alerts you may see in this manual Safety and Equipment Damage Alert Descriptions Alert Description DANGER A hazard is present that will result in death or serious personal injury if the warning is ignored A WARNING A hazard is present or an unsafe practice can result in serious personal injury if the warning is ignored 4 CAUTION The hazard or unsafe practice could result in minor to moderate personal injury if the warning is ignored A Equipment Damage The hazard or unsafe practice could result in property damage i
14. Replace defective fan Clean or replace foam filter Replace cooler Replace cooler thermoelectric module inside cooler failed Replace cooler thermocouple bad Alarm Conv Temp Alarm Perm Gas Temp Alarm Pressure Converter temperature low Incorrect Perm oven set temperature or alarm settings Perm oven heater thermistor or gas thermistor is out of calibration Perm oven failure High pressure indication Molybdenum converter should be hot to the touch if not the heater may have failed Check that converter temp set point is approximately 325 C Check that voltage to the heater is 115 VAC Check that the alarm settings match the set temp Calibrate the thermistor Replace the Perm oven Check the pump for a tear in the diaphragm replace with pump repair kit if necessary Refer to Preventive Maintenance chapter in this manual Check that capillaries are properly installed and 0 rings are in good shape Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Alarm Message Possible Cause Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Action Replace if necessary Check flow system for leaks Alarm Flow Flow low Check sample capillary 0 020 inch 1D for blockage Replace as necessary If using sample particulate filter make sure it is not blocked Disconnect sample particulate filter from the sample bulkhead if flow increases replace the f
15. chapter A Model 42 Instruction Manual 5 1 Preventive Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement Parts Cleaning the Outside Case A Ozonator Air Feed Drying Column Replacement Capillaries Inspection and Replacement A 5 2 Model 42i Instruction Manual See the Servicing chapter for a list of replacement parts Clean the outside case using a damp cloth being careful not to damage the labels on the case Equipment Damage Do not use solvents or other cleaning products to clean the outside case A Use the following procedure to replace the ozonator air feed drying column Hu Remove the drying column from the connector DRY AIR bulkhead on the rear panel of the instrument 2 Replace spent absorbent material indicating Drierite or silica gel with new or regenerated material 3 Reinstall the drying column to the DRY AIR bulkhead 4 Perform a Zero Span check see the Calibration chapter The capillaries normally only require inspection when instrument performance indicates that there may be a flow problem Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing chapter A Use the following procedure to inspect and replace the capillaries This procedure can be used to check a
16. e Linearity through all ranges e Internal sample pump except with internal permeation span source option e Independent NO NO2 NO ranges e Replaceable NO converter cartridge e User selectable digital input output capabilities e Standard communications features include RS232 485 and Ethernet e C Link MODBUS Geysitech Bayern Hessen and streaming data protocols For details of the analyzer s principle of operation and product specifications see the following topics e Principle of Operation on page 1 2 e Specifications on page 1 3 Model 42 Instruction Manual 1 1 Introduction Principle of Operation Principle of Operation 1 2 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific is pleased to supply this NO NO NO analyzer We are committed to the manufacture of instruments exhibiting high standards of quality performance and workmanship Service personnel are available for assistance with any questions or problems that may arise in the use of this analyzer For more information on servicing see Chapter 7 Servicing The Model 42 operates on the principle that nitric oxide NO and ozone Os react to produce a characteristic luminescence with an intensity linearly proportional to the NO concentration Infrared light emission results when electronically excited NO2 molecules decay to lower energy states Specifically NO 03 gt NO2 02 hv Nitrogen dioxide NO2 must first be transf
17. 2 of the required flow rate The pressure regulator for the standard NO cylinder must have a non reactive diaphragm and internal parts and a suitable delivery pressure F C FLOW CONTROLLER F M FLOW METER F C Fo MIXING CHAMBER Figure 4 1 GPT System Model 42 Instruction Manual 4 3 Calibration Equipment Required Ozone Generator Diverter Valve Reaction Chamber Mixing Chamber Output Manifold Reagents The ozone generator must be capable of generating sufficient and stable levels of ozone for reaction with NO to generate NO concentrations in the range required Note Ozone generators of the electric discharge type may produce NO and NO and are not recommended A A valve can be used to divert the NO flow when zero air is required at the manifold The reaction chamber used for the reaction of ozone with excess NO should have sufficient volume so that the residence time meets the requirements specified in this chapter The mixing chamber is used to provide thorough mixing of the reaction g P 8 8 products and diluent air The output manifold should be of sufficient diameter to insure an insignificant pressure drop at the analyzer connection The system must have a vent designed to insure atmospheric pressure at the manifold and to prevent ambient air from entering the manifold The following information describes the NO concentration standard and the method for calculating the NO concentrat
18. 4 With the cursor at Calibrate Zero press Ce The Analog Output Cal line displays Zero Note When calibrating the analog output always calibrate zero first and then calibrate full scale A 5 Use until the meter reads 0 0V or 0 0 or 4 0 mA for a current channel then press to save the value 6 Press to return to the previous screen 7 Press 4 to select Calibrate Full Scale 8 Use t until the meter reads the value shown in the Set Output To line then press to save the value Model 42i Instruction Manual 7 29 Servicing Analog Input Calibration Analog Input Calibration Calibrating the Input Channels to Zero Volts Calibrating the Input Channels to Full Scale 7 30 Model 42 Instruction Manual Use the following procedures to calibrate the analog inputs after replacing the optional I O expansion board These procedures include selecting analog input channels calibrating them to zero volts and then calibrating them to full scale using a known voltage source Use the following procedure to calibrate the input channels to zero volts 1 From the Main Menu press to scroll to Service nress gt CE 1o scroll to Analog Input Calibration and press e 2 The Analog Input Cal screen displays Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 3 At the Analog Input Cal screen press Y to scroll t
19. AS m 1 Y7 i oe y Remove Packing 2 pieces Remove Packing al 2 pieces Units without Optional 1 0 Board Units with Optional 1 0 Board Figure 2 1 Remove the Packing Material 4 Remove the three shipping screws Figure Shipping Screws 3 Figure 2 2 Remove the Shipping Screws 5 Check for possible damage during shipment 6 Check that all connectors and circuit boards are firmly attached 2 2 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Setup Procedure 7 Re install the cover 8 Remove any protective plastic material from the case exterior Setup Procedure Use the following procedure to setup the instrument Thermo Fisher Scientific 1 Connect the sample line to the SAMPLE bulkhead on the rear panel Figure 2 3 Ensure that the sample line is not contaminated by dirty wet or incompatible materials All tubing should be constructed of FEP Teflon 316 stainless steel borosilicate glass or similar tubing with an OD of 1 4 inch and a minimum ID of 1 8 inch The length of the tubing should be less than 10 feet Figure 2 3 Model 42i Rear Panel Note Gas must be delivered to the instrument free of particulates It may be necessary to use the Teflon particulate filter as described in Teflon Particulate Filter on page 9 12 A Note Gas must be delivered to the instrument at atmospheric pre
20. Instruction Manual 3 61 Operation Diagnostics Menu Relay States Test Analog Outputs Set Analog Outputs 3 62 Model 42 Instruction Manual The Relay States screen displays the state of the 10 digital outputs and allows toggling of the state to either on 1 or off 0 The relays are restored to their original states upon exiting this screen e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Relay States e Press to togele and set the relay state open or closed DH pikor A a E SO a EA The Test Analog Outputs menu contains a number of digital to analog converter DAC calibration items Channel choices include all analog outputs 6 voltage channels and 6 current channels if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Test Analog Outputs yua Py PTHTE pH pripi Mid BEA e Lc A LA The Set Analog Outputs screen contains three choices Set to full scale set to zero or reset to normal Full scale sets the analog outputs to the full scale voltage zero sets the analog outputs to 0 volts and normal operation The example below shows the selected output state ALL is set to normal e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Test Analog Outputs gt ALL Voltage Channel 1 6 or Current Channel 1 6 Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu Instrument Configuration The Instrument Configuration screen displays information on the hardware configur
21. PMT Voltage Adjustment 6 To install the power supply follow the previous steps in reverse 7 Recalibrate the instrument Refer to the calibration procedures in the Calibration chapter PMT Voltage Use the following procedure to adjust the PMT voltage after switching Ad j ustment from standard to extended ranges or vice versa service representatives 4 f WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified 1 Select the NO NO and NO ranges Refer to Range Menu in the Operation chapter 2 Set the NO BKG and NO BKG calibration factors to 0 0 Refer to Calibration Factors Menu in the Operation chapter 3 Set the NO COEF NO COEF and NO COFF to 1 000 4 Set the Averaging Time to 10 seconds Refer to Averaging Time in the Operation chapter 5 Connect the calibration gas and allow the instrument to sample calibration gas until the reading stabilizes 6 From the Main Menu press to scroll to Service gt press gt to scroll to PMT Voltage Adjustment gt and press The Set PMT Voltage screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 7 At the Set PMT Voltage screen use t to increment decrement the counts until the instrument displays the calibration gas concentration value 7 16 Model 42 Instruction Manual The
22. Range Menu Range Menu The Range menu allows the operator to select the gas units NO NO NO ranges and to set the custom ranges The screens below show the range menu in single range mode and dual auto range modes The only difference between the screens are the words HI and LO to indicate which range is displayed For more information about the single dual and auto range modes see Single Range Mode Dual Range Mode and Auto Range Mode below e Inthe Main Menu choose Range pbb i Poh dyn My Pert oP Te bei PS PhP L Pi AS e REI A e i Single Range Mode Inthe single range mode the NO NO and NO channels each have one range one averaging time and one span coefficient By default the three analog outputs are arranged on the rear panel connector as shown in Figure 3 4 See Table 3 2 for channels and pin connections Single range mode may be selected from the Range Mode Select on page 3 74 3 8 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Range Menu o 37 O 19 Figure 3 4 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector in Single Range Mode Table 3 2 Default Analog Outputs in Single Range Mode Channel Connector Pin 1 0 Terminal Pin Description 1 14 1 NO Analog Output 2 33 3 NO Analog Output 3 15 5 NO Analog Output 4 34 7 None 5 17 9 None 6 36 11 None Ground 16 18 19 35 37 2 4 6 8 10 12 Signal Ground No
23. This is necessary if the two ranges are not close to one another For example the low NO range is set to 0 50 ppb and the high NO range is set to 0 20 000 ppb Figure 3 6 Analog Output in Auto Range Mode Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 11 Operation Range Menu By default in the auto range mode the analog outputs are arranged on the rear panel connector as shown in Figure 3 7 See Table 3 4 for channels and pin connections Auto range mode may be selected from the Range Mode Select on page 3 74 000000000000000000 c000000000000000000 O Figure 3 7 Pin Out of Rear Connector in Auto Range Mode Table 3 4 Default Analog Outputs in Auto Range Mode Channel Connector Pin 1 0 Terminal Pin Description 1 14 1 NO Analog Output 2 33 3 NO Analog Output 3 15 5 NO Analog Output 4 34 7 Range Status half scale high range zero scale low range 5 17 9 None 6 36 11 None Ground 16 18 19 35 37 2 4 6 8 10 12 Signal Ground Note All channels are user definable If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration the default selections my not apply A 3 12 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Gas Units NO NO and NO Thermo Fisher Scientific Ranges Operation Range Menu The Gas Units screen defines how the NO NO and NO concentration readings are expressed Gas units of parts per billio
24. and also makes the data available over the serial or Ethernet connection Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction Specifications Figure 1 1 Model 42 Flow Schematic Specifications Table 1 1 lists the specifications for the Model 4227 Table 1 1 Model 42 Specifications Thermo Fisher Scientific Preset ranges 0 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 ppm 0 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 30 mg m Extended ranges 0 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 ppm 0 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 150 mg m Custom ranges Zero roise 0 0 05 to 20 ppm 0 0 2 to 100 ppm in extended ranges 0 0 1 to 30 mg m 0 0 5 to 150 mg m in extended ranges 0 20 ppb RMS 60 second averaging time Lower detectable limit Zero drift 24 hour 0 40 ppb 60 second averaging time lt 0 40 ppb Span drift 1 full scale Response time in automatic mode 40 seconds 10 second averaging time 80 seconds 60 second averaging time 300 seconds 300 second averaging time Linearity 1 full scale Sample flow rate 0 6 0 8 LPM Operating temperature 15 35 C may be safely operated over the 0 45 C Model 42 Instruction Manual 1 3 Introduction Specifications Power requirements 100 VAC 50 60 Hz 115 VAC 50 60 Hz 220 240 VAC O 50 60 Hz 300 watts Physical dimensions 16 75 W X 8 62 H X 23 D Weight Approximately 55 Ibs Analog outputs
25. can t wrong settings The example below reports that the NO coefficient is 1 000 Send no coef Receive no coef 1 000 set no coef value set no2 coef value set nox coef value set high no coef value set high no2 coef value set high nox coef value set low no coef value set low no2 coef value set low nox coef value Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Calibration These commands set the NO NO and NO coefficients to user defined values to value where value is a floating point representation of the coefficient The example below sets the NO coefficient to 1 005 Send set no coef 1 005 Receive set no coef 1 005 ok no gas no2 gas nox gas high no gas high no2 gas high nox gas low no gas low no2 gas low nox gas These commands report NO NO and NO span gas concentrations used to auto calibrate low NO NO and NO coefficients The high and low commands are only available in dual and auto range mode If the mode is incorrect the instrument responds with can t wrong settings The example below reports that the NO low span gas concentration is 240 0 ppb Send low no gas Receive low no gas 2400E 1 ppb set no gas value set no2 gas value set nox gas value set high no gas value set high no2 gas value set high nox gas value set low no gas value set low no2 gas value set low nox coef value These commands set the NO NO and NO span gas concentrations used by th
26. handle it carefully A Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth it may easily scratch the plate A Do not use alcohol acetone MEK or other Ketone based or aromatic solvents to clean the LCD module use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases A Do not shake or jolt the LCD module A Model 42 Instruction Manual 7 3 Servicing Firmware Updates Firmware Updates Accessing the Service Mode Replacement Parts List 7 4 Model 42i Instruction Manual A 4 E Figure 7 1 Properly Grounded Antistatic Wrist Strap The firmware can be updated by the user in the field via the serial port or over the Ethernet This includes both the main processor firmware and the firmware in all low level processors Refer to the Port manual for the firmware update procedure If the Service Menu is not displayed on the Main Menu use the following procedure to display it 1 At the Main Menu press 4 o scroll to Instrument Controls gt e 4 press gt to scroll to Service Mode gt and press The Service Mode screen appears 2 Press to toggle the Service Mode to ON 3 Press gt _M to return to the Main Menu 4 Return to the procedure Table 7 1 lists the replacement parts for the Model 427 major subassemblies Refer to Figure 7 2 to identify the component location Table 7 1 Model 42i Replacem
27. hexadecimal string with the most significant bit MSB being input 16 Send dig in Receive dig in Oxff7f din channel This command reports the action assigned to input channel and the corresponding active state The example below reports the input 5 to be assigned an index number 9 corresponding to action of analog outputs to zero with the active state being high Send din 5 Receive din 5 9 AOUTS TO ZERO high set din channel index state This command assigns digital input channel 1 16 to activate the action indicated by index 1 35 when the input transitions to the designated state high or low Use list din var command to obtain the list of supported index values and corresponding actions Send set din 1 3 high Receive set din 1 3 high ok dout channel This command reports the index number and output variable and the active state assigned to output channel The example below reports the input 2 to be assigned an index number 2 corresponding to local remote with the active state being open Send dout 4 Receive dout 4 11 GEN ALARM open Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration set dout channel index state This command assigns digital output channel to be assigned to the action associated with index and assigns it an active state of state open or closed Send set dout 4 11 open Receive set dout 4 11 open ok dtoa channel This reports the outputs of the 6 or 12
28. set analog iout range 4 1 ok Table B 10 Analog Current Output Range Values Range Output Range 1 0 20 mA 2 4 20 mA 0 cannot be set to this but may report Undefined analog vin channel This command retrieves the analog voltage input channel data both the calculated value and the actual voltage In the example below the calculated value of channel 1 is 75 325 degrees F volts are 2 796 This command responds with feature not enabled if the I O expansion board is not detected Send analog vin 1 Receive analog vin 1 75 325 2 796 analog vout range channel This command reports the analog voltage output channel range where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive according to Table B 11 Send analog vout range 2 Receive analog vout range 2 3 set analog vout range channel range This command sets analog voltage output channel to the range where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive and range is set according to Table B 11 The example below sets channel 2 to the 0 10 V range Model 42 Instruction Manual B 43 C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration B 44 Model 42 Instruction Manual Send set analog vout range 2 3 Receive set analog vout range 2 3 ok Table B 11 Analog Voltage Output Range Values Range Output Range 1 0 1V 2 0 100 mV 3 0 10 V 4 0 5 V 0 cannot be set to this but may report Undefined dig in This command reports the status of the digital inputs as a 4 digit
29. 24VDC 8630 Fan Filter 101905 00 Fuse 250VAC 4 0 Amp SlowBlow for 100VAC and 110VAC models 101904 00 Fuse 250VAC 2 0 Amp SlowBlow for 220 240VAC models 101688 00 Ambient Temperature Connector with Thermistor 4119 Capillary 0 008 inch ID 4127 Capillary 0 015 inch ID 6556 Optical Filter Kit Red Filter Quartz Window Rubber Washer Model 42 Instruction Manual 7 5 Servicing Cable List Part Number Description 6998 Cable List DriRite Table 7 2 describes the Model 423 spare cables See the Troubleshooting chapter for associated connection diagrams and board connector pin descriptions Table 7 2 Model 42i Cables Part Number 101036 00 Description DC Power Supply 24V Output 1037 00 115VAC Supply to Interface Board 1048 00 RS 485 Data 1038 00 AC Power Switch to Motherboard 1364 00 DC Power Supply Status Monitor 1054 00 Motherboard to Front Panel Board 1035 00 DC Power Supply AC Input 1033 00 AC from Receptacle 1377 00 AC to Power Switch 1267 00 1346 00 1355 00 Fan Power Cable Temperature Control Signal Output Ribbon 1695 00 Permeation Oven 1050 00 Heater Power 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 1055 00 Main AC Receptacle Assembly 102057 00 External Device Connection Components instrument Part Number 102562 00 102556 00 102645 00 AC to External Pump Table 7 3
30. 4 Input 24 Keypad Row 3 Input 25 Keypad Col 2 Select 26 Keypad Col 1 Select 27 Keypad Col 4 Select 28 Keypad Col 3 Select 29 Ground 30 Ground 31 Ground 32 Ground 33 24V 34 24V LCD DATA J2 1 LDO_5V LCD Signal 2 LD1_5V LCD Signal 3 LD2_5V LCD Signal 4 LD3_ONOFF_5V LCD Signal 5 LCD_ONOFF_5V LCD Signal 6 LFLM_5V LCD Signal 7 NC 8 LLP_5V LCD Signal 9 LCLK_5V LCD Signal 10 5V 11 Ground Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description 25V LCD Bias Voltage Ground KEYBOARD J3 mo N ow A WO N Keypad Row 1 Input Keypad Row 2 Input Keypad Row 3 Input Keypad Row 4 Input Keypad Col 1 Select Keypad Col 2 Select Keypad Col 3 Select Keypad Col 4 Select LCD BACKLIGHT J4 gt 5V Supply NC Ground Table 6 6 0 Expansion Board Optional Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label EXPANSION 1 0 Reference Designator J1 Pin gt OO a N on A WW N gt ES gt gt gt gt a gt w N Signal Description Analog Voltage Input 1 Analog Voltage Input 2 Analog Voltage Input 3 Ground Analog Voltage Input 4 Analog Voltage Input 5 Analog Voltage Input 6 Ground Analog Voltage Input 7 Analog Voltage Input 8 Ground NC Current Output Return Ground Current Output 1 Model 42i Instruction Manual 6 17 Troubleshootin
31. 42 Instruction Manual set copy sp to lrec set copy sp to srec set copy sp to stream These commands copy the current selections in scratch pad sp into the long record short record or streaming data list The example below copies the current list in scratch pad into the long records list Send set copy sp to lrec Receive set copy sp to lrec ok set copy rec to sp set copy srec to sp set copy stream to sp These commands copy the current contents of the long record short record or streaming data list into the scratch pad sp These commands are useful in easy modification of current long record short record or streaming data lists The example below copies the current list of long records into the scratch pad Send set copy lrec to sp Receive set copy lrec to sp ok sp field number This command reports the variable number and name stored at index in the scratch pad list The example below shows that the field 5 in the scratch pad is set to index number 13 which is for the variable pressure Send sp field 5 Receive sp field 5 13 pres set sp field number value number 1 32 is the maximum number of fields in long and short record lists number 1 18 is for streaming data lists This command sets the scratch pad field number item number in scratch pad list to value where value is the index number of a variable in the analog out variable list Available variables and their corresponding index numbers may be
32. Current Pin Channel Channel 1 14 1 15 2 33 2 17 3 15 3 19 4 34 4 21 5 17 5 23 6 36 6 25 Ground 16 18 19 35 37 Current Output Return 13 16 18 20 22 24 Table 7 5 Analog Input Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections Input Channel P 1 o INID A AJN o I NIDJI AJ wy N o Ground 4 8 11 14 7 28 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Output Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Servicing Analog Output Calibration Use the following procedure to calibrate the analog outputs if a meter reading in the Analog Output Testing procedure differed by more than one percent or after replacing the optional I O expansion board Equipment Required Multimeter 1 Connect a meter to the channel to be adjusted and set to voltage or current as appropriate Figure 7 15 shows the analog output pins and Table 7 4 identifies the associated channels 2 From the Main Menu press _ _ to scroll to Service gt press 2 gt to scroll to Analog Output Calibration gt and press The Analog Output Cal screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 3 At the Analog Output Cal screen press _4_ to scroll to the desired voltage channel or current channel corresponding to the rear panel terminal pin where the meter is connected then press e
33. Diagrams incas io 6 6 Connector Pin Descriptions sesessessseessseseesessresesesteresrstesesereeresrsreseses 6 8 ea AA iai a a a 6 21 SONIC arar 7 1 Safety PESCA oe anus id dio cid 7 2 Firmware Updates iii 7 4 Accessmerhe Service Mode eri 7 4 Replacement Partit td adiccion er a 7 4 Cable rr e e da 7 6 External Device Connection Components occccccoccconononcnnnnonnnnnononanncnnos 7 6 Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel 7 8 Pump Replacement sli cage EEES esena 7 9 Fan Replacements di islas idos 7 10 PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber Assembly Replacement 7 11 Photomultiplier Tube Replacement si a IAS 7 13 PMT High Voltage Power Supply Replacement ocoocncnnnnnnconnnomo 7 14 PMT Voltage AUSEMEEs ains osugannscass 7 16 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Reaction Chamber Cleaning or Removal urinario 7 17 NO gt to NO Converter Replacement coocninnnnnnonncnnnncnnonnnncnonnnacnnono 7 18 Solenoid Valve Replace eiii dead 7 20 Ozonator Assembly Replacement iniciarte 7 21 Ozonator Transformer Replacements 7 23 Input Board Replacement e a a ee 7 23 A A nina Oe cn a 7 25 DC Power Supply Replacement ina iia 7 25 Analog Output Testing iii ti 7 26 Analog Output Calibration arista 7 29 Analog Input Calibration ssssseseeeeesesesesesesesesssssrsrsrsrsrsrsesrsesesesesesesese 7 30 Calibrating the Input Channels to Zero Volts oooonnocnnoninncnnnooo 7 30 Calibrating the Inpu
34. Digital to Analog converters according to Table B 12 The example below shows that the D A 1 is 97 7 full scale Send dtoa 1 Receive dtoa 1 97 7 Note If the instrument is in a mode which does not provide a particular output and that output is selected the value will be 0 0 a All channel ranges are user definable If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration the default selections may not apply A Table B 12 Default Output Assignment DtoA Function Single Range Dual Range Auto Range 1 Voltage Output NO High NO High Low NO 2 Voltage Output NO High NO High Low NO2 3 Voltage Output NO High NO High Low NO 4 Voltage Output Not Used Low NO Range NO 5 Voltage Output Not Used Low NO Not Used 6 Voltage Output Not Used Low NO Not Used 7 Current Output NO High NO High Low NO 8 Current Output NO High NO High Low NO2 9 Current Output NO High NO High Low NO 10 Current Output Not Used Low NO Range NO 11 Current Output Not Used Low NO Not Used 12 Current Output Not Used Low NO Not Used Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual B 45 C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration B 46 Model 42 Instruction Manual list var aout list var dout list var din These commands report the list of index numbers and the variables associated with that index number available for selection in the current mode determined by single dual auto gas mode
35. Factory Cal Gas Therm gt Set Defaults Factory Calibrate Oven The Factory Calibrate Oven Thermistor menu is used for calibrating the Thermistor permeation oven heater thermistor to either low point high point or set defaults e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Perm Oven Settings gt Factory Cal Oven Therm 3 88 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Low and High Points The Calibrate Oven Thermistor Low Point screen is used to view and set the permeation oven thermistor resistance The low and high point screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Perm Oven Settings gt Factory Cal Oven Therm gt Low or High Point Set Defaults The Set Defaults screen is used to reset the configuration values to factory defaults e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Perm Oven Settings gt Factory Cal Oven Therm gt Set Defaults CHP ED bet Ozonator Safety The Ozonator Safety screen is used to turn the ozonator safety feature on or off If the ozonator safety is turned off the ozonator will always be on Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 89 Operation Service Menu even if the converter is not up to temperature The ozonator safety screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt O
36. Fail Relay 16 Digital Inputs and 6 Analog Voltage Outputs Internal connectors include e Function key panel and Display e Measurement Interface Board Data e I O Expansion Board Data e Digital Output Board e AC distribution Thermo Fisher Scientific Measurement Interface Board Measurement Interface Board Connectors Flow Sensor Assembly Pressure Sensor Assembly Temperature Control Thermo Fisher Scientific Board System Description Electronics The measurement interface board serves as a central connection area for all measurement electronics in the instrument It contains power supplies and interface circuitry for sensors and control devices in the measurement system It sends status data to the motherboard and receives control signals from the motherboard Connectors located on the measurement interface board include e Data communication with the motherboard e 24V and 120VAC power supply inputs e Fans and solenoid outputs e Cooler control e 120VAC outputs for the pump and temperature control board e Ozonator e Flow and pressure sensors e Ambient temperature sensor e Temperature control board e PMT high voltage supply e Measurement input board e Permeation oven option The flow sensor assembly consists of a board containing an instrumentation amplifier and a flow transducer with input and output gas fittings The flow transducer output is produced by measuring the pressure difference across
37. For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter The pressure sensor s zero counts and span slope are displayed on the menu Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pressure Calibration Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 75 Operation Service Menu Calibrate Pressure Zero The Calibrate Pressure Zero screen calibrates the pressure sensor at zero pressure Note A vacuum pump must be connected to the pressure sensor before pump P performing the zero calibration A e In the Main Menu choose Service gt Pressure Calibration gt Zero Calibrate Pressure Span The Calibrate Pressure Span screen allows the user to view and set the pressure sensor calibration span point Note The plumbing going to the pressure sensor should be disconnected so the sensor is reading ambient pressure before performing the span calibration The operator should use an independent barometer to measure the ambient pressure and enter the value on this screen before calibrating A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pressure Calibration gt Span 3 76 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Restore Default Pressure The Restore Default Pressure Calibration screen allows the user to reset the Calibration pressure calibration configuration values to factory defaults e Inthe Main
38. Lo NO field displays the current NO concentration The Lo NO Span Conc field is where you enter the low NO calibration gas concentration Use Ce gt to move the cursor left and right and use Ce Es to increment and decrement the numeric character at the cursor Press to calculate and save the new low NO coefficient based on the entered span concentration Press gt to return to the Run screen Use the following procedure to calibrate the NO channel to the NO calibration gas l Adjust the O3 generator in the GPT system to generate sufficient O3 to produce a decrease in the low NO concentration equivalent to about 80 of the URL of the low NO2 range The decrease must not exceed 90 of the low NO concentration determined in the Calibrate Low NOx procedure From the Main Menu choose Calibration gt Cal Lo NO2 Coefficient The Lo NO field displays the current NO concentration The Lo NO Span Conc field is where you enter the Lo NO calibration gas concentration Set the low NO calibration gas concentration to reflect the sum of the NO concentration generated by GPT and any NO impurity Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibrate High NO Calibrate High NO Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration in Dual Range and Auto Range Mode Use e J to move the cursor left and right and use to increment and decrement the numeric character at the cursor Press to calculate and save t
39. Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter 8 Perform an input board calibration See the Input Board Calibration procedure that follows Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Input Board Calibration Input Board Afer replacing the input board use the following procedure to calibrate the Calibration Pudo f WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives A 1 Erom the Main Menu press to scroll to Service gt nress gt to scroll to Input Board Calibration gt and press Le The Input Board Calibration screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 2 At the Input Board Calibration screen press to select Manual Input Cal and press to calibrate The screen displays the frequency at GAIN 1 3 Make a note of the FREQ value displayed at GAIN 1 then press Ce or gt to change the GAIN to 100 4 At the GAIN 100 screen use to increment the D A counts until the FREQ value matches or is slightly above within 50 counts the value noted in the previous step 5 Press to store the value The screen flashes Calculating Please Wait and Done Values Saved messages DC Power Supply Use the following procedure to replace the DC power supply Figure 7 Replacement Equipment Required DC power supply Philips screwdriver Therm
40. Manual 8 5 System Description Electronics Electronics Motherboard External Connectors Internal Connectors 8 6 Model 427 Instruction Manual All electronics operate from a universal switching supply which is capable of auto sensing the input voltage and working over the entire operating range Internal pumps and heaters all operate on 110VAC An optional transformer is required if operating on the 210 250VAC or 90 110VAC ranges An on off switch controls all power to the instrument and is accessible on the front panel The motherboard contains the main processor power supplies a sub processor and serves as the communication hub for the instrument The motherboard receives operator inputs from the front panel mounted function key panel and or over I O connections on the rear panel and sends commands to the other boards to control the functions of the instrument and to collect measurement and diagnostic information The motherboard outputs instrument status and measurement data to the front panel mounted graphics display and to the rear panel I O The motherboard also contains I O circuitry and the associated connector to monitor external digital status lines and to output analog voltages that represent the measurement data Connectors located on the motherboard include External connectors include e External Accessory e RS 232 485 Communications two connectors e Ethernet Communications e I O connector with Power
41. Menu concentrations readings that the instrument generates using its own internal calibration data The Calibration Factors menu displays the calibration factors The screens below show the calibration factors menu in single mode and dual auto range modes The only difference between the screens are the words HI and LO to indicate which range is displayed Normally the instrument is calibrated automatically using the Calibration menu described in Calibration Menu later in this chapter However the instrument can also be calibrated manually using the Calibration Factors menu To manually calibrate the instrument see NO and NOx Backgrounds NO NO2 and NOx Coefficients and Calibration Pressure below for more information e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 17 Operation Calibration Factors Menu NO and NO Backgrounds The NO and NO background corrections are determined during zero 3 18 Model 42 Instruction Manual calibration The NO background is the amount of signal read by the analyzer in the NO channel while sampling zero air The NO background is the amount of signal read by the analyzer in the NO channel while sampling zero air Although the background is expressed in terms of concentration the background signal is actually the combination of electrical offsets PMT dark currents and trace substances undergoing chemilumi
42. Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 81 Operation Service Menu Analog Output Calibration The Analog Output Calibration menu is a selection of 6 voltage channels and 6 current channels if I O expansion board option is installed to calibrate and allows the user to select the calibration action zero or span The analog output calibration is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Calibration 3 82 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Output Calibrate Zero Analog Output Calibrate Full Scale Analog Input Calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu The Analog Output Calibrate Zero screen allows the user to calibrate the zero state of the selected analog output The operator must connect a meter to the output and adjust the output until it reads 0 0 V on the meter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Calibration gt Select Channel gt Calibrate Zero The Analog Output Calibrate Full Scale screen allows the user to calibrate the full scale state of the selected analog output The operator must connect a meter to the output and adjust output until it reads the value shown in the set output to field e Inthe Main Menu choose Servi
43. NOs and NO Coefficients iniciadas 3 19 Calibration Presses 3 20 Reset User Calibration Detanlt nic ica 3 20 Calibrador ideeaid 3 21 Calibrate NO and NO Backoroundscc nro ona 3 22 Model 42 Instruction Manual v Contents vi Model 42 Instruction Manual Calibrate NO NO and NO Coefficients oooocococnnncnnnononononononoss 3 22 Calibrato PEU 3 23 Zero span Checo di nidos 3 23 Next asta 3 24 Period Hot da o 3 24 Zeto Span Purge Duration Minutes sccccscesd oieasidedeeteseraeesntecesss 3 25 Zero Span Averaging Time isa 3 25 ETO SOA Ratione enep eee spy a AA ST 3 26 Instrument Controls Meta 3 26 A EA S 3 26 PME Spee lee 3 27 Auto Manual Modena AS 3 27 Dataloosino Seto tl ata seat aaa 3 28 Select SRECIERE Cas 3 28 View Logged Dita AS 3 29 Number of Records til 3 29 Date and Tierna dass dos 3 30 Erase Lop O 3 30 See rones NNN 3 31 Choose taa Type tddi os 3 31 Concentration iodo tados 3 32 Other Measurement ra aia ios 3 32 A O aed Je 3 33 Commit Content 0 ccccccssssccecececeesessnseceecccsesessnseaeeececeesesensaaees 3 33 Reset to Default Contents oi ii 3 34 Configure Datalooging aiii 3 34 Logging Period Mi co terutd senses ao cacy oct Sons beddacaaiege opine aca 3 35 Memory Allocation Petce n ty s 33 cinveasctiiisinceesenetadeda sheouseavcovousss 3 35 Data Treat len 3 35 Communication SECOS dada di is dis 3 36 A A te eae hut ates 3 36 Instrument TDS AAA AAS 3 37 Communication Provocoliisaiaa it 3 37 Str
44. Panel Removing the The measurement bench can be removed and the partition panel can be Measurement Bench lowered to improve access to connectors and components Refer to the following steps when a procedure requires lowering the partition panel see and Lowering the igure 7 3 Partition Panel REMOVE SCREWS SLIDE BENCH OUT Pass Through Connectors Remove Screw Loosen Captive Partition Panel Screw Remove Screw ps LOWER PANEL Remove Hidden Screw Figure 7 3 Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel Equipment Required Philips screwdriver amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small 1 Turn instrument OFF and unplug the power cord 7 8 Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Pump Replacement 2 If the instrument is mounted in a rack remove it from the rack 3 Remove the cover 4 Disconnect the plumbing connections at the rear of the measurement bench 5 Disconnect the three connectors that pass through the center of the partition panel 6 Remove two screws from the left side of the case viewed from front 7 Remove one screw from the bottom front of the case 8 Remove one screw from the top front of the partition panel 9 While holding the case securely loosen the captive screw
45. Panel Pushbuttons 3 2 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Pushbuttons Table 3 1 lists the front panel pushbuttons and their functions Table 3 1 Front Panel Pushbuttons Key Name Function E Soft Keys The E soft keys are used to provide shortcuts that allow the user to jump to user selectable menu screens For more information on processing soft keys see Soft Keys below gt Run The Cr is used to display the Run screen The Run screen normally displays the NO NO and NO concentrations Cm Menu The Cm is used to display the Main Menu when in the Run screen or back up one level in the menu system For more information about the Main Menu see Main Menu later in this chapter 2 Help The 2 is context sensitive that is it provides additional information about the screen that is being displayed Press for a brief explanation about the current screen or menu Help messages are displayed using lower case letters to easily distinguish them from the operating screens To exit a help screen press _ J or to return to the previous screen or to return to the Run screen Ce JC Jeup Down The four arrow pushbuttons t y J land Ce gt Left Right move the cursor up down left and right or change values and states in specific screens Enter The is used to select a menu item accept set save a change and or toggle on off functions
46. Receive contrast 5 50 set contrast evel This command sets the screen s level of contrast according to Table B 8 The example below sets the contrast level to 50 Send set contrast 5 Receive set contrast 5 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual B 35 C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration B 36 Model 42 Instruction Manual Table B 8 Contrast Levels Level Contrast Level 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 O ao mwasl os ony AJN o conv set temp This command reports the temperature that the NO converter is set to The example below reports that the converter temperature is set to 625 C Send conv set temp Receive conv set temp 625 deg C set conv set temp value This command sets the temperature that the NO converter is set to where value is an integer representing dwgrees C The example below sets the converter temperature to 625 C Send set conv set temp Receive set conv set temp 625 deg C ok date This command reports the current date The example below reports the date as December 1 2004 Send date Receive date 12 01 04 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration set date mm dd yy mm month dd day yy year This command sets the date of the analyzer s internal clock The example below sets the date to December 1 2004 Send set dat
47. Thermistor Ground 15V_PWR Cooler On Off Control AC TEMP PJ8 AC HOT Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 2 AC NEUT 3 AC Ground NO NOX SOL PJ9 24V 2 NO NOX Solenoid Control SAMPLE SOL PJ10 24V 2 Sample Solenoid Control Z S SOL PJ11 24V 2 Zero Span Solenoid Control SPARE1 SOL PJ12 24V 2 Spare 1 Solenoid Control SPARE2 SOL PJ13 24V 2 Spare 2 Solenoid Control PERM OVEN POJ1 Perm Oven Gas Thermistor THERM 2 Ground PERM OVEN POJ3 1 Perm Oven Heater On Off 2 15V_PWR 3 Perm Oven Thermistor 4 Ground Table 6 5 Front Panel Board Connector Pin Diagram Connector Label MOTHER BOARD Reference Designator J1 Pin oOo o N own A 0 N gt o Signal Description Ground Ground LCLK LCD Signal Ground Ground LLP LCD Signal LFLM LCD Signal LD4 LCD Signal LDO LCD Signal LD5 LCD Signal LD1 LCD Signal Model 42 Instruction Manual 6 15 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 16 Model 42 Instruction Manual Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 12 LD6 LCD Signal 13 LD2 LCD Signal 14 LD7 LCD Signal 15 LD3 LCD Signal 16 LCD Bias Voltage 17 5V 18 Ground 19 Ground 20 LCD_ONOFF LCD Signal 21 Keypad Row 2 Input 22 Keypad Row 1 Input 23 Keypad Row
48. Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt Select Relay gt Instrument State ERED CH Pr Tit WH mid Alarms The Alarms status screen allows the user to select the alarm status for the selected relay output The selected item is shown by lt after it The I O board status alarm is only present if the I O expansion board is installed The zero and span check calibration alarms are only present if the zero span valve option is installed and the instrument is operating in manual mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt Select Relay gt Instrument State gt Alarms Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 45 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Non Alarm The Non Alarm status screen allows the user to select the non alarm status for the selected relay output The selected item is shown by lt after it e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt Select Relay gt Instrument State gt Non Alarm DH piber MAPA Digital Input Settings The Digital Input Settings menu displays a list of the 16 digital inputs available and allows the user to select the logic state and instrument parameter for the relay selected Note The digital inputs must be
49. a complete manual calibration is being performed The calibration pressure is set equal to the reactor pressure at the time of calibration The acceptable range for calibration pressure is between 150 and 300 mmHg Note Turning the pressure compensation ON and OFF can produce significant artificial jumps in the apparent sample concentration If the pressure compensation feature is to be used the instrument must be calibrated with the pressure compensation feature ON For more information about calibration see Chapter 4 Calibration A Reset User Calibration The Reset User Calibration Default screen allows the user to reset the Default calibration configuration values to factory defaults e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Calibration Factors gt Reset User Cal Defaults 3 20 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Calibration Menu Calibration Menu The Calibration menu is used to calibrate the analyzer including zero backgrounds the NO NO and NO coefficients and the calibration pressure The screens below show the calibration menu in single mode and dual auto range modes The zero span check is visible only if the zero span option is installed in single range mode The calibration procedure is the same in dual auto or single range however there are two sets of gas coefficients in dual or auto range i e low and high coefficients This enables each range to be calibrated sep
50. a precision orifice This unit is used for measuring the flow of sample gas in the measurement system The pressure sensor assembly consists of a board containing an instrumentation amplifier and a pressure transducer with a gas input fitting The pressure transducer output is produced by measuring the pressure difference between the sample gas pressure and ambient air pressure The temperature control board regulates and sets the temperature of the reaction chamber and converter Model 42 Instruction Manual 8 7 System Description Electronics PMT Power Supply Assembly Input Board Assembly Digital Output Board 1 0 Expansion Board Optional 8 8 Model 42 Instruction Manual The reaction chamber temperature is measured with a thermistor The voltage across the thermistor is fed to the main processor for use in calculating and displaying the reaction chamber temperature The voltage across the thermistor is also compared to a set point voltage and used to control that the reaction chamber heaters to maintain a constant temperature of 50 C Protective circuitry prevents over heating in the event of broken wires to the thermistor The converter temperature is measured by a conditioned thermocouple signal and fed back to the main processor to be used to display and control the converter temperature The temperature control board receives control signals from the main processor software to control the converter heater to the de
51. arta acs bane Dect iii 8 4 Measurement Calculations cdi rad 8 5 Output Communication ssssessesseseeesesrsrreresrrresrestertsresteseserresrrsreereees 8 5 Electronics aida 8 6 Motherboard a A a E NS 8 6 External Connectors sI iii RGN 8 6 Internal Connectors as ti e a 8 6 Measurement Interface Board ii lan 8 7 Measurement Interface Board Connectors seseeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeees 8 7 Flow Sensor Assembly A trais hsa 8 7 Pressure Sensor A A E 8 7 Temperature Control Borda o in 8 7 PMT Power Supply Assembly slo Gch dea nectar ates 8 8 Input Board Assemblirinininina aida 8 8 Digital Output Borrada 8 8 I O Expansion Board Optional vicriainmiin atico 8 8 Front Panel Connector Board rc ida 8 9 WOO POMS I ES usais iii 8 9 Analog Voltage Qutp tso i ennnen thle tea tans ucts 8 9 Analog Current Outputs Optional rscmiinnaicoc ainia 8 10 Analog Voltage Inputs Optional sssessesesesessssssseeeseresrrerrrereresesesss 8 10 Digital Relay OUEN leadtusvapace tates 8 10 A ens Se nti Sa teh ae late 8 10 A A O e a aa o 8 11 RS 232 Comme Gt OU sta rice 8 11 RS 485 Connection siria ici 8 12 Ethemet Connections tido 8 12 External Accessory Connector aia aii 8 12 Chapter 9 Optional Equipment 3aniaa dada 9 1 Internal Zero Span and Sample Valves vecinita tas 9 1 Internal Permeation Span OU a 9 2 Permeation Tube Installation ia sc cectei is ceria it ecaataee es 9 3 Computation of Concentrations A canescens la 9 4 Oven Installation and Conbiovrations s lt d
52. as shown in Figure 9 3 The delayed sample is then routed identically to the NO channel The two channels operate 180 out of phase that is when the instrument is monitoring NO the NO sample is being bypassed and when the instrument is monitoring NO the NO sample is being bypassed The solenoids switch every 5 seconds and the size of the lag volume has been chosen so the same original sample is being monitored by both the NO and the NO channels In this way any positive or negative errors in the NO signal determined by the difference between the NO and NO readings is minimized especially in a situation where the sample is changing rapidly e g an urban traffic environment The Model 42 stores the NO signal obtained during the first half of the solenoid cycle determines the NO signal during the second half of the solenoid cycle and then calculates and updates a NO NO and NO signal every 10 seconds Averages are available then from 10 to 300 seconds Model 42 Instruction Manual 9 11 Optional Equipment Ammonia Scrubber i Flow Ozonator 03 Cleanser Sensor Capillary Dry Air AAA Electronics Sample Reaction Chamber NO Capillary Sample pablo vays Capillar 2 A Filter NO2 NO f Converter j NO Mode Pressure Transducer Zero Span Valve 03 Converter Chamber Exhaust Permeation Oven Figu
53. asserted for at least one second for the action to be activated A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Digital Input Settings DH vibe Piet Logic State The Logic State screen is used to change the I O relay to either normally open or normally closed The default state is open which indicates that a relay connected between the digital input pin and ground is normally open 3 46 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu and closes to trigger the digital input action If nothing is connected to the digital input pin the state should be left at open to prevent the action from being triggered e Press to toggle and set the logic state open or closed Instrument Action The Instrument Action screen allows the user to choose the instrument action that is tied to the selected digital input e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Digital Input Settings gt Select Relay gt Instrument Action Wi hid Analog Output The Analog Output Configuration menu displays a list of the analog Configuration output channels available for configuration Channel choices include all voltage channels all current channels voltage channels 1 6 and current channels 1 6 if the I O expansion board option is installed Configuration choices include selecting range setting minimum maximum
54. at the rear of the measurement bench and pull the measurement bench from the rear of the case 10 Remove the screw at the top rear of the partition panel securing the top of partition panel to the measurement bench and lower the panel being careful not to put excessive tension on the cables 11 Replace the measurement bench by following previous steps in reverse Pump Replaceme nt Use the following procedure to replace the pump see Figure 7 4 To rebuild the pump see Pump Rebuilding in the Preventive Maintenance chapter Equipment Required 110V pump Screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 7 9 Servicing Fan Replacement 2 Disconnect pump power line from AC PUMP connector on the measurement interface board Captive Screws 4 Figure 7 4 Replacing the Pump 3 Remove both lines from pump 4 Loosen the four captive screws on the mounting plate and remove the pump 5 Install the new pump by following the previous steps in reverse Fan Replacement Use the following procedure to replace the fan Figure 7 5 Equipment Required Fan Philips screwdriver amounts of static electricity A properly grounded a
55. between zero and span calibrations for determining instrument malfunction or drift Because this option does not precisely control dilution gas flow it should not be used as a basis for instrument zero and span adjustments calibration updates or adjustment of ambient data Whenever there is an indication of instrument drift or malfunction a full zero and multipoint calibration Level 1 should be performed prior to corrective action For further information on zero span and calibration of air pollution monitors refer to Section 2 0 9 of the US EPA s Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems Volume 11 Figure 9 2 shows how this option is integrated with the Model 42 components Energizing the sample valve V1 shuts off the sample flow and permits the flow of zero air for analysis When valves V1 and V2 are energized the flow of zero air mixes with air containing NO from the permeation oven This mode of operation provides a single point span check Thermo Fisher Scientific Chamber Exhaust Optional Equipment Internal Permeation Span Source Y Flow Ozonator 03 Cleanser Sensor Capillary Electronics Reaction Chamber Capillary Capillary Converter NO Mode Pressure Transducer 03 Converter Permeation Oven Figure 9 2 Flow Diagram Internal Permeation with Zero Span Valve Permeation Tube Use the following procedure to instal
56. cccccccsscscssssecsscecssscecssseccsseeeeseeees 3 87 Factory Calibrate Gas Thermistor sadyictschsted comsstocsadsvetviacesheneenns 3 87 Low and High Points ica 3 87 Set Dera 52a oa etnies 3 88 Factory Calibrate Oven Uh ermistory icc lt scescssesattsccuseveradesacessenteers 3 88 Low and Hb Pointsi ricochet leech ce Pata Oa eas eo 3 89 Sebas AS 3 89 Ozonator a ads 3 89 DI O dade sae ansbuseavadinae noninsaeetadeiadbauhamanadd 3 90 Display Pixel Tetas agonia let pl dc 3 90 Restore User Default o a 3 91 Password ME A A A amt 3 91 Ser Pas word A E E dss nanel oe aad 3 92 Codes Aa 3 92 Change Password ici td 3 92 Remove Pas OL Sn 3 93 Unlock Tis CRUE TE al 3 93 Calibration lt gt hea aiid eae 4 1 Equipment Required italia 4 1 Zero Las Ena tstietans siatwadalae tena dieans E E 4 2 COMPE uan Ri od aa 4 2 DA eE sahinasna 4 2 Oe ETEO A T E E A 4 2 SUD iii E A TE 4 2 Gas Phase AO Aa 4 3 Flow Controlle annene annaa ta a i 4 3 Pressure Rei eso das 4 3 Ozon GENE siria 4 4 Mi AA A teeth ANA 4 4 Reaction CA iz 4 4 Mixing Chamber aiii 4 4 Output Manifold A nT aro mir Una nr or ee URE 4 4 Reasons 4 4 NO Concentration Sanidad ia 4 4 Assaying a Working NO Standard Against a NIST traceable NO SS ATTA bess SEE EEA EE conic aah tiers 4 5 LAER OPA A A sack eas eats de nda esha A 4 6 Dynamic Parameter Specifications for Gas Titrator eeseeeeeeees 4 6 Determining GPT System Flow Conditions 0 cee eeeseeseeeeeeees 4 6 PES CAMDEN AA eda dccoa ten
57. cooler assembly by twisting it slightly back and forth 6 To install PMT follow previous steps in reverse making sure to backfill the cooler with dry air or nitrogen prior to replacing the PMT 7 Perform a photomultiplier tube calibration See PMT Voltage Adjustment in the Operation chapter Use the following procedure to replace the PMT high voltage power supply Figure 7 8 Equipment Required PMT high voltage power supply Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing PMT High Voltage Power Supply Replacement Nut driver 1 4 inch Philips screwdriver amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the two PMT high voltage supply cables 3 Loosen the two retaining screws securing the assembly bracket to the floor plate and slide the assembly towards the rear slightly and lift it off the base screws 4 Loosen two screws on the input box assembly and lift the input box assembly off the power supply 5 Remove the four screws securing the power supply to the bracket and remove the power supply Assembly Bracket HVPS Input Box Screws 2 Assembly Bracket Screws 2 Figure 7 8 Replacing the PMT HVPS Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 7 15 Servicing
58. details Ignore the recommended zero offset adjustments Use the following procedure to calculate the NO concentration standard and NO impurity 1 Generate several NO concentrations by dilution of the NO working standard 2 Use the nominal NO concentration NO nom to calculate the diluted concentrations 3 Plot the analyzer NO response in ppm versus the nominal diluted NO concentration and determine the slope Snom 4 Calculate the NO concentration of the working standard NO srp from NO Isrp NO Inom X SNOM 5 Ifthe nominal NO concentration of the working standard is unknown generate several NO concentrations to give on scale NO responses 6 Measure and record Fno and Fr for each NO concentration generated 7 Plot the analyzer NO response versus Fno Fr and determine the slope which gives NO srp directly The analyzer NO responses to the generated NO concentrations reflect any NO impurity in the NO working standard Model 42 Instruction Manual 4 5 Calibration Equipment Required 8 Plot the difference between the analyzer NO and NO responses versus Exo Fr The slope of this plot is NO2 imr Zero Air A source of zero air free of contaminants should be used as described earlier in this chapter Contaminants can cause a detectable response on the instrument and may also react with the NO Oz or NO during the gas phase titration Dynamic Parameter Use the following definitions for the remainder o
59. for analog output digital output and digital inputs The index number is used to insert the variable in a field location in a list using set sp field index The example below reports the list of analog output index numbers and variables Send list var aout Receive list var aout index variable O none 1 no 2 no2 3 nox 18 intt 19 rctt 20 pmtt 21 convt 25 pres 26 smplf 27 28 ain 29 ain 30 ain 31 ain 32 ain 33 ain 34 ain 35 ain yo 3 cot lt CON DUNBWNPR relay stat This command reports the current relay logic normally open or normally closed if all the relays are set to same state that is all open or all closed The example below shows that the status when all the relays logic is set to normally open Send relay stat Receive relay stat open Note If individual relays have been assigned different logic then the response would be a 4 digit hexadecimal string with the least significant byte LSB being relay no 1 A Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition For example Receive relay stat 0x0001 indicates relay no 1 is set to normally open logic all others are normally closed Receive relay stat 0x0005 indicates relay no 1 and 3 are set to be normally open logic all others are normally closed set relay open set relay open value set relay closed set relay closed value These commands set the relay logic to normally open or closed
60. for relay number value where value is the relay between 1 and 16 The example below sets the relay no 1 logic to normally open Note If the command is sent without an appended relay number then all the relays are assigned the set logic of normally open closed A Send set relay open 1 Receive set relay open 1 ok Record Layo ut The Erec Lrec Srec layouts contain the following Definition A format specifier for parsing ASCII responses e A format specifier for parsing binary responses In addition to these the Erec Layout contains e A format specifier for producing the front panel displays Values are read in using either the ASCII or binary format specifiers and converted to uniform internal representations 32 bit floats or 32 bit integers These values are converted into text for display on the screen using the format specifier for the front panel display Normally the specifier used to parse a particular datum from the input stream will be strongly related to the specifier used to display it such as all of the floating point inputs will be displayed with an f output specifier and all of the integer inputs will be displayed with a d specifier Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual B 47 C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition Format Specifier for ASCII Responses Format Specifier for Binary Responses B 48 Model 42 Instruction Manual The first line of the Layout response is the scanf lik
61. gas reaching the analyzer Ruptured pump diaphragm Blocked sample capillary No ozone reaching the reaction chamber Check input sample flow Rebuild pump head Unplug power cord Clean or replace capillary Check the Instrument Control menu to see if the ozonator is ON If it is ON check dry air supply No output signal Disconnected or defective input or high voltage supply Analyzer not calibrated Defective 15 volt Unplug power cord Check that cables are connected properly Check cable resistance Recalibrate Check supply voltages Diagnostics menu Calibration Drift Excessive Noise 6 2 Model 42 Instruction Manual Dryer to ozonator depleted Line voltage fluctuations Defective pump Unstable NO or NO source Clogged capillaries Clogged sample air filter Defective or low sensitivity PMT Defective input board Replace Check to see if line voltage is within specifications Rebuild pump Replace Unplug power cord Clean or replace capillary Replace filter element Unplug power cord Remove PMT Install known good PMT Plug in power cord Check performance Replace board Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Malfunction Possible Cause Defective cooler Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Action Check temperature less than 2 C at Tamb 25 C Non linear response Incorrect calibration source Leak
62. is used to edit the host name When DHCP is enabled this name is reported to the DHCP server e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Host Name p ai i e m 1 0 Configuration The I O Configuration menu deals with configuration of the analyzer s I O system The analog input configuration is displayed only if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration Note The digital outputs may take up to one second after the assigned state occurs to show up on the outputs A Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 43 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Output Relay Settings The Output Relay Settings menu displays a list of the 10 digital output relays available and allows the user to select the logic state or instrument parameter for the relay selected e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings CH cua AA Logic State The Logic State screen is used to change the I O relay to either normally open or normally closed e Press to toggle and set the logic state open or closed Instrument State The Instrument State submenu allows the user to select the instrument state that is tied to the selected relay output A submenu lists signal types of either alarm or non alarm to choose from 3 44 Model 42 Instruction Manual
63. known concentration The NO NO and NO Coefficient screens operate the same way Therefore the following description of the NO coefficient screen applies to the NO and NO coefficient screens as well The display shows the current NO concentration reading The next line of the display shows the NO span coefficient that is stored in memory and is being used to correct the NO concentration Notice that as the span coefficient value is changed the current NO concentration reading on the above line also changes However no real changes are made to the value stored in memory until is pressed Only proposed changes as indicated by a question mark prompt are displayed until is pressed In dual or auto range modes HIGH or LOW is displayed to indicate the calibration of the high or low coefficient The example below shows the coefficient screen in dual auto range mode Note The concentration value will show ERROR if the measured concentration is not a valid span value either higher than the selected range or 0 or lower A e In the Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt NO NO2 or NOx Coef Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 19 Operation Calibration Factors Menu CH pikor MAPA Calibration Pressure The Calibration Pressure screen reports the reactor pressure at which current calibration was performed The screen also allows this value to be edited by the operator This value should not be changed unless
64. least 10 seconds for the reading to stabilize use _ and _ to enter the flow sensor reading and press to save the value 11 Install the cover Use the following procedure to replace the front panel board Figure 7 22 Equipment Required Eront panel board Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the three ribbon cables and the two wire connector from the front panel board 3 Pop off the board from the two top mounting studs and remove the board by lifting it up and off the slotted bottom support 4 Replace the front panel board by following previous steps in reverse Thermo Fisher Scientific Mounting Studs 2 Ribbon Cables 3 LCD Module Replacement A A Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing LCD Module Replacement LCD Module LCD Module Screws 2 Retaining Screw Front Panel Board Two Wire Connector e Bottom Support Figure 7 22 Replacing the Front Panel Board and the LCD Module Use the following procedure to replace the LCD module Figure 7 22 Equipment Required LCD module Philips screwdriver CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks do not to let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts yo
65. lists the standard and optional cables and components used for connecting external devices such as PCs and data loggers to an iSeries Table 7 3 External Device Connection Components Description Terminal Block and Cable Kit DB25 optional Terminal Block and Cable Kit DB37 optional Cable DB37M to Open End Cable Six Feet optional 102646 00 Cable DB37F to Open End Six Feet optional 7 6 Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing External Device Connection Components Part Number Description 102659 00 Cable DB25M to Open End Six Feet optional 6219 Cable RS 232 optional 102888 00 Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB37F standard with all instruments 102891 00 Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB37M standard with all instruments 103084 00 Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB25M optional Included with optional I O Expansion Board in all instruments Converter Flow Reaction Transducer Chamber PMT Assembly Scurbber Flow Switch Capillaries 2 Pressure Transducer Input Board HVPS Pump Measurement Interface Board 1 0 Expansion Board Opt Power Supply Ozonator Ozonator Motherboard Digital Output Board Transfomer Solenoid Figure 7 2 Component Layout Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 7 7 Servicing Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition
66. measurement interface board The release rate for the permeation tube is then determined by weight loss in the actual oven being used You can use either of the two calibration methods presented here One method involves performing the Setting Perm Oven Temperature procedure and then continuing with the Setting Temperature with Water Bath procedure Alternatively you can perform the Setting Perm Oven Temperature procedure and then continue with the Setting Temperature with Known Resistance procedure In either case use the following procedure for setting the perm oven temperature 1 Unplug POJ3 from the measurement interface board Place a 4 369 KO resistor across pins 3 and 4 on the board 1 In the Main Menu choose Service gt Perm Oven Settings gt Cal Oven Thermistor Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Internal Permeation Span Source 2 Enter the exact value of the attached resistor and press to save the offset 3 Press Cm to return to the Permeation Oven menu 4 Remove the resistor and re attach the permeation oven to POJ3 Setting Temperature with Use the following procedure for setting the measure temperature with water Water Bath bath 1 Remove the thermistor from the permeation tube oven but leave the thermistor connected to the measurement interface board Insert the thermistor into the water bath next to an NIST traceable thermometer if necessary use an extension ca
67. menu are determined by the instrument s password status e Inthe Main Menu choose Password Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 91 Operation Lock Instrument SetPassword The Set Password screen is used to set the password to unlock the front panel The set password screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is set e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Set Password Lock Instrument The Lock Instrument screen is used to lock the instrument s front panel so users can not change any settings from the front panel The lock instrument screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is set e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Lock Instrument Change Password The Change Password is used to change the password used to unlock the instrument s front panel The change password screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Change Password 3 92 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Remove Password Remove Password The Remove Password screen is used to erase the current password and disable password protection The remove password screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password set e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Remove Password Un lock Instrument The Unlock Instrument screen is used to enter the password to unlock the front panel The unlock instrument is show
68. minimum and maximum flow screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Flow gt Min or Max Ozonator Flow The Ozonator Flow screen read only is used to display the ozonator flow readings If the ozonator flow reading is 0 050 LPM 50 cc or below an alarm is activated and an alarm condition screen appears as LOW If the ozonator flow is above 0 050 the no alarm condition screen is displayed indicating that the flow is acceptable Inadequate ozonator flow will cause the ozonator to overheat resulting in permanent damage to the ozonator e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Ozonator Flow 3 70 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu Zero and Span The Zero Span Check screen allows the user to view the status of the most Check recent zero check and set the maximum zero check offset The zero and span check screens are visible only if the zero span check option is enabled and function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Zero or Span Check CH eo bet ETRE E nool besse iT hal kr d TP E a ss i Max Zero and Span Offset The Max Zero Check Offset screen is used to change the maximum zero check offset The maximum zero and span offset screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Zero or Span Check gt Max Offset parara i AAA sy E PE dra MT PA o Pil Bebb Cu Crd Zero and Span Auto T
69. obtained using the command list var aout The set sp field command is used to create a list of variables which can then be transferred into the long record short record or streaming data lists using the set copy sp to lrec set copy sp to srec or set copy sp to stream commands Send set sp field 1 34 Receive set sp field 1 34 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration C Link Protocol Commands Calibration stream per This command reports the currently set time interval in seconds for streaming data Send stream per Receive stream per 10 set stream per number value number value 1 2 5 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 300 This command sets the time interval between two consecutive streaming data strings to number value in seconds The example below sets the number value to 10 seconds Send set stream per 10 Receive set stream per 10 ok stream time This command reports if the streaming data string will have a time stamp attached to it or not according to Table B 5 Send stream time Receive stream time O set stream time value This command enables value where value is to attach or disable time stamp to streaming data string according to Table B 5 The example below attaches a time stamp to streaming data Send set stream time O Receive set stream time O ok Table B 5 Stream Time Values Value Stream Time 00 Attaches tim
70. on page 7 10 PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber Assembly Replacement on page 7 11 Photomultiplier Tube Replacement on page 7 13 PMT High Voltage Power Supply Replacement on page 7 14 PMT Voltage Adjustment on page 7 16 Reaction Chamber Cleaning or Removal on page 7 17 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 7 1 Servicing Safety Precautions Safety Precautions 7 2 Model 42i Instruction Manual A NO2 to NO Converter Replacement on page 7 18 Solenoid Valve Replacement on page 7 20 Ozonator Assembly Replacement on page 7 21 Ozonator Transformer Replacement on page 7 23 Input Board Replacement on page 7 23 Input Board Calibration on page 7 25 DC Power Supply Replacement on page 7 25 Analog Output Testing on page 7 26 Analog Output Calibration on page 7 29 Analog Input Calibration on page 7 30 Pressure Transducer Assembly Replacement on page 7 31 Pressure Transducer Calibration on page 7 32 Temperature Control Board Replacement on page 7 34 Ambient Temperature Calibration on page 7 35 Fuse Replacement on page 7 36 Scrubber Replacement on page 7 36 I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement on page 7 37 Digital Output Board Replacement on page 7 39 Motherboard Replacement on page 7 39 Measurement Interface Board Replacement on page 7 40 Flow Transducer Replacem
71. other analog values or variables read the status of the digital outputs of the analyzer and to trigger or simulate the activation of a digital input to the instrument This is achieved by using the supported MODBUS parameters listed below For details of the Model 42i MODBUS Protocol specification see the following topics e Serial Communication Parameters on page C 1 e TCP Communication Parameters on page C 2 e Application Data Unit Definition on page C 2 e Function Codes on page C 3 e MODBUS Parameters Supported on page C 8 Additional information on the MODBUS protocol can be obtained at http www modbus org References are from MODBUS Application Protocol Specification V1 1a MODBUS IDA June 4 2004 The following are the communication parameters that are used to configure the serial port of the iSeries to support MODBUS RTU protocol Number of Data bits 8 Number of Stop bits 1 Parity None Data rate from 1200 115200 Baud 9600 is default Model 42 Instruction Manual C 1 MODBUS Protocol TCP Communication Parameters TCP Communication Parameters Application Data Unit Definition Slave Address MBAP Header C 2 Model 42 Instruction Manual iSeries Instruments support the MODBUS TCP protocol The register definition is the same as for the serial interface TCP connection port for MODBUS 502 Here are the MODBUS ADU Application Data Unit formats over serial and TCP IP
72. reports the current permeation gas temperature The example below reports that the permeation gas temperature is 45 C Send perm gas temp Receive perm gas temp 45 deg C pmt temp This command reports the PMT cooler temperature The example below reports that the PMT cooler temperature is 2 8 C Send pmt temp Receive pmt temp 2 8 deg C pmt voltage This command reports the PMT voltage The example below reports that the current PMT voltage is 750 volts Send pmt voltage Receive pmt voltage 750 Model 42 Instruction Manual B 11 C Link Protocol Commands Measurements B 12 Model 42 Instruction Manual pres This command reports the current reaction chamber pressure The first pressure reading is the pressure reading being used in instrument calculations The second pressure is the actual pressure reading being measured If pressure compensation is on then both pressure readings are the same If pressure compensation is off a pressure of 300 mmHg is used as default pressure even though the actual pressure is 306 3 mmHg The example below shows that the actual reaction chamber pressure is 306 3 mmHg Send pres Receive pres 753 4 mm Hg actual 306 6 react temp This command reports the current reaction chamber temperature The example below reports that the current reaction temperature is 49 0 C Send react temp Receive react temp 49 0 deg C flags This reports 8 hexadecimal digits or flags that represe
73. same applies to perform just a span or purge check e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Zero Span Check gt Zero Span or Purge Duration Min sy E PE dra Pi Tite op mete PPP LES iti Bei PETE PLP PRE Zero Span Averaging The Zero Span Averaging Time screen allows the user to adjust the Time zero span averaging time The zero span averaging time is used by the analyzer only when performing an automatic zero or span check The analyzer s averaging time is used for all other functions The following averaging times are available 1 2 5 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 and 300 seconds e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Zero Span Check gt Zero Span Avg Sec ERE CH ld Pi Tate eA BTN EEE TE haa ioe ob Saal come EE fee PEE SEE Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 25 Operation Instrument Controls Menu 3 26 Zero Span Ratio Instrument Controls Menu Ozonator Model 42 Instruction Manual The Zero Span Ratio screen is used to adjust the ratio of zeros to spans For example if this value is set to 1 a span check will follow every zero check If this value is set to 3 there will be two zero checks between each zero span check This value may be set from 1 to 10 with 1 as default e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Zero Span Check gt Zero Span Ratio The Instrument Controls menu contains a number of items The software controls listed in this menu enable c
74. that after the field has been parsed out the resulting value is to be divided by 104d Thus the 16 bit field OxFFC6 would be interpreted with the format specifier n3 as the number 0 058 Thermo Fisher Scientific Format Specifier for Thermo Fisher Scientific EREC Layout Text Value String Value Source C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition The subsequent lines in the ERec Layout response describe the appearance of the full panel The full instrument panel as it appears on the screen has two columns of lines Each line is composed of three major components 1 a text field 2 a value field and 3 a button None of these three components is required The text field contains statically displayed text The value field displays values which are parsed out of the response to a DATA ERec command It also displays though background changes alarm status The button when pressed triggers input from either a dialog box or a selection list There are five kinds of buttons B I L T and N Each line in the layout string corresponds to one line on the display The layout string describes each of the three major fields as well as translation mechanisms and corresponding commands The first field in the layout string is the text It is delimited by a The string up to the first will be read and inserted in the text field of the line This is followed by a possible string enclosed in quotes that is used to pl
75. that time period The front panel display and analog outputs are updated every 10 seconds for averaging times between 10 and 300 seconds An averaging time of 10 seconds for example means that the average concentration of the last 10 seconds will be output at each update An averaging time of 300 seconds means that the moving average concentration of the last 300 seconds will be output at each update Therefore the lower the averaging time the faster the front panel display and analog outputs respond to concentration changes Longer averaging times are typically used to smooth output data The Averaging Time screen for the single range mode is shown below In the dual and auto range modes an Averaging Time Menu is displayed before the averaging time screens This additional menu is needed because the dual and auto range modes have two averaging times high and low The Averaging Time screen functions the same way in the single dual and auto range modes The following averaging times are available 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 and 300 seconds Additional averaging times are available in NO and NO modes 1 2 and 5 seconds For more information about the manual mode see Auto Manual Mode later in this chapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Calibration Factors Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Averaging Time arn pH pibobi dt Mimmi Calibration Factors Calibration factors are used to correct the NO NO and NOx
76. the converter is not being heated to the proper temperature the instrument needs servicing leak or imbalance or the converter needs replacement or servicing The NO analog output will reflect the NO concentration generated by GPT any NO impurity and the NO zero offset The recorder response will be as follows Recorder Response scale NO2 Jour 22222 xX 1004 URL ZNO Where URL Nominal upper range limit of the NO channel ppm Record the NO concentration and the analyzer s NO response Maintaining the same Eno Fo and Fp adjust the ozone generator to obtain several other concentrations of NO over the NO range at least five evenly spaced points across the remaining scale are suggested Record the stable responses and plot the analyzer s NO responses versus the corresponding calculated using the above equation for NO our concentrations and draw or calculate the NO calibration curve Note It is important that the curve be linear within 1 FS over the NO range If the curve is nonlinear the analyzer is not operating correctly possible leak or converter failure etc and should be serviced Assuming the curve is linear subsequent data should be reduced using this NO calibration curve response A Model 42 Instruction Manual 4 15 Calibration Calibration in Dual Range and Auto Range Mode Alternative Calibration Procedure Using NO Permeation Tube Calibration in Dual Range and
77. the instrument to local or remote mode The example below sets the instrument to the local mode Send set mode local Receive set mode local ok program no This command reports the analyzer s model information and program version number which will be dependant on the current version Send program no Receive program no iSeries 42i 01 00 01 074 set layout ack This command disables the stale layout layout change indicator that is attached to each response if the layout has changed Send set layout ack Receive set layout ack ok analog iout range channel This command reports the analog current output range setting for channels where channel must be between 1 and 6 inclusive The example below reports current output channel 4 to the 4 20 mA range according to Table Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration B 10 This command responds with feature not enabled if the I O expansion board is not detected Send analog iout range 4 Receive analog iout range 4 2 set analog iout range channel range This command sets analog current output channel to the channel range where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive and range is set according to Table B 10 The example below sets current output channel 4 to the 0 20 mA range This command responds with feature not enabled if the I O expansion board is not detected Send set analog iout range 4 1 Receive
78. to Calibrate Full Scale and press The screen displays the current input voltage for the selected channel 5 Use l e Jand J to enter the source voltage and press _ to calibrate the input voltage for the selected channel to the source voltage 6 Press gt to return to the input channels display and repeat Steps 3 5 to calibrate other input channels to the source voltage as necessary Use the following procedure to replace the pressure transducer assembly Figure 7 16 Equipment Required Pressure transducer assembly Philips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Model 42 Instruction Manual 7 31 Servicing Pressure Transducer Calibration 2 Disconnect plumbing from the pressure transducer assembly Note the P 8 P y plumbing connections to facilitate reconnection 3 Disconnect the pressure transducer cable Retaining Screws 2 Pressure Transducer Assembly Figure 7 16 Replacing the Pressure Transducer 4 Remove the two pressure transducer assembly retaining screws and remove the pressure transducer assembly 5 To install the pressure transducer assembly follow previous steps in reverse 6 Calibrate the pressure transducer Refe
79. used 12 Relay6_ContactB 24 24V Model 42 Instruction Manual 2 7 Installation Connecting External Devices 25 Pin Terminal Board The 25 pin terminal board is included with the optional I O Expansion Board See Detail A NE See Detail B Assembled Connector Figure 2 7 25 Pin Terminal Board Views Detail A Table 2 3 25 Pin Terminal Board Pin Descriptions Detail B Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description 1 lOut1 13 Analog_In1 2 Isolated ground 14 Analog_In2 3 lOut2 15 Analog_In3 4 Isolated ground 16 GNDD 5 lOut3 17 Analog_In4 6 Isolated ground 18 Analog_In5 7 lOut4 19 Analog_In6 8 Isolated ground 20 GNDD 9 lOut5 21 Analog_In7 10 Isolated ground 22 Analog_In8 11 lOut6 23 GNDD 12 Isolated ground 24 GNDD 2 8 Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Startup Sta rtup Use the following procedure when starting the instrument 1 Turn the power ON 2 Allow 90 minutes for the instrument to stabilize Note it is best to turn the ozonator on and let the instrument run overnight before calibration in order to obtain the most accurate information A 3 Set instrument parameters such as operating ranges and averaging times to appropriate settings For more information about instrument parameters see the Operation chapter 4 Before beginning the actual monitoring perform a multipoint calibration as
80. values and choosing signal to output e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 47 Operation Instrument Controls Menu eal lt O OCH ET E MAMA ir er le y Gal lt O OCH ET A MAMAS Select Output Range The Select Output Range screen is used to select the hardware range for the selected analog output channel Possible ranges for the voltage outputs are 0 100 mV 0 1 0 5 0 10 V e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt Select Channel gt Select Range Minimum and Maximum The Minimum Value screen is used to edit the zero 0 to full scale 100 Value value in percentages for the selected analog output channel See Table 3 7 for a list of choices In dual or auto range mode HI or LO is displayed to indicate high or low concentrations Range Status is visible only in auto range mode The minimum and maximum output value screens function the same way The example below shows the set minimum value screen e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt IO Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt Select Channel gt Set Minimum or Maximum Value 3 48 Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Table 3 7 Analog Output Zero to Full Scale Table
81. words which correspond to each input value the zeroth value appearing first 0 gt local 1 gt remote etc The selection list shows that only the first two values in this case are to be shown to the user when the button is pressed The T button indicates full translation input code to string and user selection number to output string xC This is a line that starts a new column the xC or L Comp 6 11x off on Tset temp comp s n This shows that the bitfield end the second part of a bitfield specification is optional The bitfield will be one bit long starting in this case at the eleventh bit Background 7f 8Bd ddd set 03 bkg s n This shows the use of indirect precision specifiers for floating point displays The background value is taken from the 7th element and the precision specifier is taken from the 8th If the asterisk were not present it would indicate instead that 8 digits after the decimal point should be displayed Thermo Fisher Scientific Serial Communication Parameters Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix C MODBUS Protocol This appendix provides a description of the MODBUS Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 RTU protocol as well as TCP IP over Ethernet The MODBUS Commands that are implemented are explained in detail in this document The MODBUS protocol support for the iSeries enables the user to perform the functions of reading the various concentrations and
82. yy srec aa bb 00 pp qq yy xxxx the number of past records yy the number of records to return 1 to 10 aa hours 01 to 24 bb minutes 01 to 59 oo month 01 to 12 pp day 01 to 31 qq year These commands output long or short records and dynamic data The output format is determined by the set lrec format and set srec format commands The logging time is determined by the set lrec per and set srec per commands In dual range the long records and short records contain the high and low NO and NO concentrations In single range the low NO and low NO values are set to 0 and the high NO and high NO are used In NO or NO only mode the pertinent high value used other concentrations are set to 0 Concentrations are stored in either ppb or pg m In the following example there are 740 long records currently stored in memory When the command lrec 100 5 is sent the instrument counts back 100 records from the last record collected record 740 and then returns 5 records 640 641 642 643 and 644 For details on how to decode the flag fields within these records see the flags command B 20 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging Send lrec 5 Receive lrec 100 5 11 03 02 22 03 flags 54089100 no 8416E 1 nox 8458E 1 lono 6474E 1 lonox 6506E 1 pres 131 4 pmtt 53 1 intt 80 0 rctt 80 0 convt 61 smplf 0 500
83. 091840092 LOW NO2 CORRECTION CONC 40093 amp 40094 LOW NOx CORRECTION CONC 40095 amp 40096 NOT USED 40097 amp 40098 NOT USED 40099840100 HIGH NO CORRECTION CONC 40101840102 HIGH NO2 CORRECTION CONC 40103 amp 40104 HIGH NOx CORRECTION CONC 40105840106 NOT USED 40107840108 NOT USED If 02 Correction Option is installed Table C 3 Write Coils for 42i Coil Number Action Triggered 101 ZERO MODE 102 SPAN MODE 103 NO MODE 104 NOX MODE 105 NOT USED 106 PRE MODE 107 SET BACKGROUND 108 CAL TO LO SPAN 109 AOUTS TO ZERO 10 AOUTS TO FS 111 CAL TO HI SPAN Model 42 Instruction Manual C 11 Serial Communication Parameters Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix D Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol This appendix provides a description of the Geysitech Bayern Hessen or BH Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 as well as TCP IP over Ethernet The Geysitech Commands that are implemented are explained in detail in this document The Geysitech protocol support for the Series enables the user to perform the functions of reading the various concentrations and to trigger the instrument to be in sample zero span mode if valid for that instrument This is achieved by using the supported Geysitech commands listed below For details of the Model 427 Geysitech Protocol specification see the following topics Serial Communication Parameters on page D 1 TCP Communic
84. 1 host name Reports sets host name string B 41 instr name Reports instrument name B 41 instrument id Reports sets instrument id B 41 internal temp Reports current internal instrument temperature B 1 isc iscreen Retrieves framebuffer data used for the display B 29 layout ack Disables stale layout layout changed indicator B 42 le left Simulates pressing left pushbutton B 29 list din Lists current selection for digital input B 18 list dout Lists current selection for digital output B 18 list Irec Lists current selection Irec logging data B 18 list sp Lists current selection in the scratchpad list B 18 list srec Lists current selection srec logging data B 18 list stream Lists current selection streaming data output B 18 list var aout Reports list of analog output index numbers and variables B 46 list var din Reports list of digital input index numbers and variables B 46 list var dout Reports list of digital output index numbers and variables B 46 low avg time Reports sets low averaging time B 9 low no Reports NO concentration calculated with low range B 10 coefficients low no coef Reports sets low range NO coefficient B 26 low no gas Reports sets low range NO span gas concentration B 27 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Command Description Page low no2 Reports NO concentration calculated with lo
85. 10 0 7 10 000 10 00 20 000 20 0 8 20 000 20 00 30 000 30 0 9 C1 C1 C1 C1 10 C2 C2 C2 C2 11 C3 C3 C3 C3 Table B 7 Extended Ranges Selection ppb ppm pgm mgm 0 200 0 2 500 0 5 1 500 0 5 1 000 1 2 1 000 1 2 000 2 3 2 000 2 5 000 5 4 5 000 5 10 000 10 5 10 000 10 20 000 20 6 20 000 20 50 000 50 7 50 000 50 100 000 100 8 100 000 100 150 000 150 9 C1 C1 C1 C1 10 C2 C2 C2 C2 11 C3 C3 C3 C3 custom range range 1 2 3 This command reports the user defined value of custom range 1 2 or 3 The example below reports that custom range 1 is defined to 5 50 ppb Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration Send custom 1 Receive custom 1 550E 2 ppb set custom range range value set custom 1 value set custom 2 value set custom 3 value set custom 1 range value set custom 2 range value set custom 3 range value These commands are used to set the maximum concentration for any of the three custom ranges 1 2 or 3 to range value where value is a floating point number representing concentration in ppb ppm pg m or mg m The example below sets the custom 1 range to 55 5 ppb Send set custom 1 range 55 5 Receive set custom 1 range 55 5 ok range mode This command reports the current range mode Send range mode Receive range mode single set range mode mode This command sets the current range mode to single dual or auto The example below sets the range m
86. 2 Instruction Manual 3 35 Operation Instrument Controls Menu E Mihei i Communication The Communication Settings menu is used with communications control Settings and configuration e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings Euer pi prin E AE bet Ebi Perk Pla Ehe PEE F Baud Rate The Baud Rate screen is used to set the RS 232 RS 485 interface baud rate Baud rates of 1200 2400 4800 and 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 are available e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Baud Rate asc 4 ERED CH Pi Taal DH Cil BEEP ad Bone nv A A EE EE 3 36 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu InstrumentID The Instrument ID screen allows the operator to edit the instrument ID The ID is used to identify the instrument when using the C Link or MODBUS protocols to control the instrument or collect data It may be necessary to edit the ID number if two or more of the same instruments are connected to one computer Valid Instrument ID numbers are from 0 to 127 The Model 42 has a default Instrument ID of 42 For more information about the Instrument ID see Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands or Appendix C MODBUS Protocol e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Instrument ID ERED key Py Tite i E hr da moi PPP LIES mik
87. 22escor25 ec stare segs tated reinan 9 4 Permeation Tube Oven Calibration criadas 9 6 Setting Perm Oven Tein peracetic inicine a bed edo idas 9 6 Setting Temperature with Water Bath 9 7 Setting Temperature with Known Resistance esseere 9 8 Determining Permeation Rate by Weight LOSS oonicnnnncnmmmmm 9 9 Determining Release Rate by Transfer Standard ccoo 9 9 Ozonator Permeation Dryer ici cesdecw etre Gace ace tee Meweeteceg 9 10 Sample Permeation Dryet iii as 9 10 Las Volume telar eiie 9 10 Principle of Operation edad iseiti Ue Jose gat 9 10 Lao Volume Letal sa A 9 12 xii Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Ammonia S r bber O 9 12 Teflon Particulate Pla 9 12 Ozone Particulate Elton 9 13 NO to NO Converter viniste 9 13 I O Expansion Board Assemblyioc2 Gara ied ete ete eee nite 9 13 Terminal Block and Cable a 9 13 ON 9 13 Mo nting Options aa nsa iaee a E E iSi 9 15 Appendix A A A dertnsbusantedvadtetnatant A 1 Appendix B C Link Protocol Commanda ssccsssssscsesssssseseeseeesesessesseesseeeeeeeateateaes B 1 Instrument Identification Nubia B 1 Commands iii oa B 2 Commands Lt id B 2 Measurements A A ath ciatadaadbymak irasas B 9 Dl AAA AS AA B 13 ALOE tas B 17 Dd o e eC A B 17 Calibration Reem eet Peer wees or Creer a ret ant art eee E B 25 Wy si LDS AY 3 see renit naa ea a acest oN a a E B 29 Measurement Configuration aida B 31 Hardware Configuration diia B 35 Communicati
88. 3 TTL Input 15 Ground Analog Voltage 1 Analog Voltage 3 Ground Analog Voltage 5 Ground Ground Power Fail Relay COM Power Fail Relay N O Contact Ground TTL Input 3 TTL Input 4 TTL Input 6 Model 42 Instruction Manual 6 9 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 26 Ground 27 TTL Input 9 28 TTL Input 11 29 TTL Input 12 30 TTL Input 14 31 TTL Input 16 32 Ground 33 Analog Voltage 2 34 Analog Voltage 4 35 Ground 36 Analog Voltage 6 37 Ground SER EN J7 Serial Enable Jumper 2 3 3V 24V IN J10 24V 2 Ground DIGITAL 1 0 J14 5V 2 24V 3 24V 4 Ground 5 Ground 6 Ground 7 SPI Reset 8 SPI Input 9 SPI Output 10 SPI Board Select 11 SPI Clock EXT RS485 J15 1 RS485 to Rear Panel 2 RS485 to Rear Panel 3 5V 4 5V 5 5V 6 Ground 7 Ground 6 10 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Pin gt gt gt gt gt al E ow N Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description Ground NC NC 24 24 24 24 24 24 MONITOR 24V Power Monitor Ground FRONT PANEL BD OOO N O o A O N gt gt o gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt co co N o a w N N N N N wo N O Ground Ground LCLK LCD Signal Ground Ground LLP LCD Signal LFLM LCD Signal LD4 LCD Signal
89. 42 Figure 7 22 Replacing the Front Panel Board and the LCD Module 7 45 Figure 8 1 Hardware COMPONENTS oocococicccncoconicccnnocononocnnnncnonocnnonononocncnncnnnnos 8 2 Figure 9 1 Flow Diagram Zero Span Option ooconoccocinconincincncinonncnnncnnnncnnnoos 9 2 Figure 9 2 Flow Diagram Internal Permeation with Zero Span Valve 9 3 Figure 9 3 Flow Diagram Lag VOlUME oococinicoccociccncccnnonncncnncnrnononornrononnoooso 9 12 Figure 9 4 Rack Mount Option Assembly onoocinonoincnncnccnincnnininncncnornoooooo 9 15 Figure 9 5 Bench MOUNtING oooococincnonccnnnnncononrnnonononrnnnonorornnnonorornononocorononnonoso 9 16 Figure 9 6 EIA Rack Mounting ooocococccncnncnocnnnnncnonnrnnnonocoronnononoronnonorornnnonooso 9 17 Figure 9 7 Retrofit Rack MOUNTINO oooonocoocinonoccconnnncnnnrnnnonocnrannonornranonnonoso 9 18 Figure BLE do tod B 13 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Tables Table 1 1 Model 42i Specifications ds 1 3 Table 1 2 Model 42i Optional Permeation Oven Specifications 1 4 Table 2 1 O Terminal Board Pin DescriptiONS oocociconcicicincincncincnnininncnnoso 2 6 Table 2 2 D O Terminal Board Pin DescriptiONS ocnoncinincincnnininncnnoos 2 7 Table 2 3 25 Pin Terminal Board Pin DescriptiONS o oooocicinoncconocnnncnnncnrnnnnoos 2 8 Table 3 1 Front Panel Pushbuttons ooooocoiccicocicociocoocoocoonoc
90. 5 inclusive separated by Send set addr dns 192 168 1 1 Receive set addr dns 192 168 1 1 ok addr gw This command reports the default TCP IP gateway address Send addr gw Receive addr gw 192 168 1 1 set addr gw address This command sets the default gateway address where address consists of 9 four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Send set addr gw 192 168 1 1 Receive set addr gw 192 168 1 1 ok addr ip This command reports the IP address of the analyzer Send addr ip Receive addr ip 192 168 1 15 set addr ip address This command sets the analyzer s IP address where address consists of four 9 numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Send set addr ip 192 168 1 15 Receive set addr ip 192 168 1 15 ok addr nm This command reports the IP netmask Send addr nm Receive addr nm 255 255 255 0 Model 42 Instruction Manual B 39 C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration B 40 Model 42 Instruction Manual set addr nm address This command sets the nm address where address consists of four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Send set addr nm 255 255 255 0 Receive set addr nm 255 255 255 0 ok baud This command reports the current baud rate for the serial port RS232 RS485 The example below reports that the current baud rate is 9600 baud Send baud Receive baud 9600 set baud rate rate
91. 6 voltage outputs 0 100 mV 1 5 10 V User selectable 5 of full scale over under range 12 bit resolution user programmable Digital outputs 1 power fail relay Form C 10 digital relays Form A user selectable alarm output relay logic 100 mA 200 VDC Digital inputs 16 digital inputs user select programmable TTL level pulled high Serial Ports 1 RS 232 or RS 485 with two connectors baud rate 1200 115200 Protocols C Link MODBUS Geysitech Bayern Hessen and streaming data all user selectable Ethernet connection RJ45 connector for 10Mbs Ethernet connection static or dynamic TCP IP addressing In non condensing environments Performance specifications based on operation in 15 35 C range Table 1 2 Model 42i Optional Permeation Oven Specifications Temperature control Single Point 45 C Temperature stability 0 1 C Warm up time 1 hour permeation device can take 24 to 48 hours to stabilize Carrier gas flow 70 scc min Chamber size Accepts permeation tubes up to 9 cm in total length 1 cm in diameter Temperature range Power requirements 15 30 C 120 VAC 50 60 Hz 50 watts in addition to the standard Model 42i Weight 1 4 Model 42 Instruction Manual Approximately 5 Ibs in addition to the standard Model 421 Thermo Fisher Scientific Lifting A Unpacking and Thermo Fisher Scientific Inspection Chapter 2 Ins
92. 9 12 e Ozone Particulate Filter on page 9 13 e NO2 to NO Converter on page 9 13 e I O Expansion Board Assembly on page 9 13 e Terminal Block and Cable Kits on page 9 13 e Cables on page 9 13 e Mounting Options on page 9 15 ith the zero span assembly option a source of span gas is connected to Internal Zero Span With the zero sp bly op f span g d the SPAN port and a source of zero air is connected to the ZERO port as and Sample Valves shown in Figure 9 1 Zero and span gas should be supplied at atmospheric pressure It may be necessary to use an atmospheric dump bypass plumbing arrangement to accomplish this For more information refer to the Installation chapter and the Operation chapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 9 1 Optional Equipment Internal Permeation Span Source Ozonator O3 Cleanser Sample Zero NQ c Zero Span N Sample Cal Valve Electronics Option Internal Permeation Span Source 9 2 Model 42i Instruction Manual Flow Sensor Capillary Dry Alr r Span Reaction Chamber Flow Sensor NO2 Converter NOx Mode Pressure Transducer O3 Converter Pump Figure 9 1 Flow Diagram Zero Span Option The Internal Permeation Span Source option is designed to provide a simple source of span gas It is intended as a quick convenient check to be used
93. AFFECTED PRODUCTS THE OBLIGATIONS CREATED BY THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT TO REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PRODUCT SHALL BE THE SOLE REMEDY OF BUYER IN THE EVENT OF A DEFECTIVE PRODUCT EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ORAL OR WRITTEN WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE SELLER DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE PRODUCTS ARE ERROR FREE OR WILL ACCOMPLISH ANY PARTICULAR RESULT A 2 Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Instrument Identification Thermo Fisher Scientific Number Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands This appendix provides a description of the C Link protocol commands that can be used to remotely control a Model 42 analyzer using a host device such as a PC or a datalogger C Link protocol may be used over RS 232 RS 485 or Ethernet C Link functions can be accessed over Ethernet using TCP IP port 9880 Streaming data is sent out the serial port or the Ethernet port on a user defined periodic basis Streaming data over Ethernet is only generated when a connection is made on TCP port 9881 For details see the following topics e Instrument Identification Number on page B 1 e Commands on page B 2 e Measurements on page B 9 e Alarms on page B 13 e Diagnostics on page B 17 e Datalo
94. AMPLE mode Other modes appear in the same area of the display as ZERO or SPAN For more information about the optional solenoid valves see Chapter 9 Optional Equipment When operating in dual or auto range mode two sets of coefficients are used to calculate the NO NO NO High and Low concentrations Also two averaging times are used one for each range The title bar indicates which range concentrations are displayed The words LOW RANGE CONCENTRATION on the top of the display indicates that the low concentration is displayed In dual range mode pressing the and arrows will toggle between high and low concentrations The example below shows the Run screen in single range mode 3 6 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Software Overview Main Menu The Main Menu contains a number of submenus Instrument parameters and settings can be read and modified within the submenus according to their function The concentration appears above the main menu and submenus in every screen The SERVICE menu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode later in this chapter e Use t Jand to move the cursor up and down e Press to select a choice e Press to return to the Main Menu or _ to return to the Run screen Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 7 Operation
95. Auto Range Mode Set NO and NO Background Readings to 4 16 Model 42 Instruction Manual Zero Using the Calibration Factors menu can change the calibration factors This is often useful in a troubleshooting situation However after the above calibration procedure is completed all subsequent data reduction depends on the calibration parameters remaining the same as during the initial calibration A Therefore never change any calibration factor without first recording the value so that after any troubleshooting procedure is completed the initial value can be re entered thereby not altering the multipoint calibration A Although it is recommended that a GPT system be used to calibrate the analyzer the procedure described in the Code of Federal Regulations Title 40 Part 50 Appendix F using a NO permeation tube may be used as an alternative procedure for calibrating the instrument The dual auto range calibration feature is used to calibrate the analyzer at two different span levels as opposed to a single span level in the standard mode generating a tailored multi point calibration curve stored in the analyzer s memory This feature may be used e When widely different gas levels are being monitored such as a factor of 10 or greater apart e If precision and span levels are being introduced using separate tanks e If more than one multi component cylinder is being used to calibrate the instrument Properly designed
96. Calibration on page 4 9 e Calibration in Dual Range and Auto Range Mode on page 4 16 e Zero and Span Check on page 4 21 The following equipment is required to calibrate the analyzer e Zero gas generator e Gas phase titrator Model 42 Instruction Manual 4 1 Calibration Equipment Required Zero Gas Generator A zero air source such as a Thermo Scientific Model 111 Zero Air Supply or Model 1160 Zero Air Supply free of contaminants such as NO NOs and O is required for dilution calibration and gas phase titration Compression The zero air source should be at an elevated pressure to allow accurate and reproducible flow control and to aid in subsequent operations such as drying oxidation and scrubbing An air compressor that gives an output of 10 psig is usually sufficient for most applications Drying Several drying methods are available Passing the compressed air through a bed of silica gel using a heatless air dryer or removing water vapor with a permeation dryer are three possible approaches Oxidation NO is usually oxidized to NO in order to ease its scrubbing Oxidation can be accomplished by either ozonation or chemical contact During ozonation the air is passed through an ozone generator The O that is produced reacts with the NO to form NO Care must be taken to allow sufficient residence time for the ozonation reaction to go to completion Chemical oxidation is accomplished by passing the air stre
97. D module use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases A Do not shake or jolt the LCD module 4 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual iii About This Manual FCC Compliance FCC Compliance WEEE Symbol Where to Get Help iv Model 42 Instruction Manual Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense A The following symbol and description identify the WEEE marking used on the instrument and in the associated documentation Symbol Description Marking of electrical and electronic equipment which applies to electrical and electronic equipment falling under the Direct
98. For more detailed information see NO and NOx Backgrounds in the Operation chapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration Use the following procedure to set the NO background Both the NO and NO background screens operate the same way and the following procedure also applies to the NO background screen Note The NO channel should be calibrated first and then calibrate the NO channel A For detailed information about the menu parameters and the icons used in these procedures see the Operation chapter l 3 Determine the GPT flow conditions required to meet the dynamic parameter specifications as indicated in Dynamic Parameter Specifications for Gas Titrator earlier in this chapter Adjust the GPT diluent air and O generator air flows to obtain the flows determined in Dynamic Parameter Specifications for Gas Phase Titrator earlier in this chapter The total GPT airflow must exceed the total demand of the analyzer The Model 427 requires approximately 700 cc min of sample flow and a total GPT airflow of at least 1 5 liters min is recommended a Allow the analyzer to sample zero air until the NO NO and NO responses stabilize b After the responses have stabilized from the Main Menu choose Calibration gt Cal NO Background c Press to set the NO reading to zero d Press Cm to return to the Calibration menu and repeat this procedure to
99. I safeyon ndu Bojeuy uoyesuaduoo dwa 49949 UBdg 019Z s jnejeq 129 19sn 19soy awit Bay IH sun sen 1e9 Pg Ndu 2 nsseld sfujpesy indu Bojeuy fBijuo9 ON ainssald L ainssald ED juauinsysu youn led Moly du auog MO 4 sBuiyjesg wwog 3909 ON 189 4209 ON s uey wojsng las piomsseg 2AQUIIY leo einssaid dua 13 009 ainssaig s6unos Bu b6ojejeg 3909 ON 189 1909 ON ebuey ON Piomsseg abueyy du jag nuog dw saqueyo sdwa apo uew ony 09 ON IPD 3909 ON buey ON juaun su 4907 peas apo obuey dw eusejuj sabeyon Aiddng Ld 6yg ON 180 65yq ON uey ON PI10MSSEH 18S py eBey0A Ld peejeq suey UOISISA wesbo1g 40 8u0ZO 6yg ON I29 yg ON aul Gay spun sep piomssed 8018S sunejy sonsoubeiq siete uonesqed iene nies Biibeisny ebuey nua urew u 19 uny uaal0g 1591 HES u 19S dn 13M0d Figure 3 3 Flowchart of Menu Driven Software 3 5 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Software Overview Power Up Screen The Power Up screen is displayed on power up of the Model 42i The Self Test is displayed while the internal components are warming up and diagnostic checks are performed Thermo ENE iSeries Run Screen The Run screen displays the NO NO and NO concentrations The status bar displays optional zero span solenoid valves if installed time and alarm status The word SAMPLE on the bottom left of the display indicates the analyzer has the span zero valve option and is in S
100. Keys Display B 30 Model 42 Instruction Manual This command retrieves the framebuffer data used for the display on the Series instrument It is 19200 bytes in size 2 bits per pixel 4 pixels per byte arranged as 320 by 240 characters The data is sent in RLE encoded form to save time in transmission It is sent as a type 5 binary C Link response with no checksum The RLE encoding consists of a O followed by an 8 bit count of consecutive OxFF bytes The following c code will expand the incoming data void unpackDisplay void far tdib unsigned char far rlescreen int ijk unsigned char far sc4bpp sc2bpp screen ptr ptr screen unsigned char far malloc 19200 RLE decode the screen for i 0 i lt 19200 8282 ptr screen lt 19200 i ptr rlescreen i if rlescreen i 0 unsigned char rlecount unsigned char rlescreen i while rlecount ptr 0 rlecount else if rlescreen i Oxff unsigned char rlecount unsigned char rlescreen i while rlecount ptr Oxff rlecount To convert this data into a BMP for use with windows it needs to be turned into a 4BPP as that is the smallest windows can display Also note Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration that BMP files are upside down relative to this data i e the top display line is the last line in the BMP sc s
101. LDO LCD Signal LD5 LCD Signal LD1 LCD Signal LD6 LCD Signal LD2 LCD Signal LD7 LCD Signal LD3 LCD Signal LCD Bias Voltagel 5V Ground Ground LCD_ONOFF LCD Signal Keypad Row 2 Input Keypad Row 1 Input Keypad Row 4 Input Model 42i Instruction Manual 6 11 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label Reference Designator Pin wo wow Wo A wo N N N N N N FP 0 N gt O O O N OQO ON A Signal Description Keypad Row 3 Input Keypad Col 2 Select Keypad Col 1 Select Keypad Col 4 Select Keypad Col 3 Select Ground Ground Ground Ground 24V 24V RS232 RS485 A P1 A OOO N on A WW N NC Serial Port 1 RX RS485 IN Serial Port 1 TX RS485 OUT NC Ground NC Serial Port 1 RTS RS485 OUT Serial Port 1 CTS RS485 IN NC RS232 RS485 B O aoa Y oo F W PY NC Serial Port 2 RX RS485 IN Serial Port 2 TX RS485 OUT NC Ground NC Serial Port 2 RTS RS485 OUT Serial Port 2 CTS RS485 IN NC AC IN PJ1 0 N AC HOT AC NEUT AC Ground AC 24VPWR 6 12 Model 42 Instruction Manual PJ2 AC HOT AC NEUT Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 3 AC Ground AC INTF BD PJ3 1 AC HOT 2 AC NEUT 3 AC Ground Table 6 4 Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label DATA Re
102. Menu choose Service gt Pressure Calibration gt Set Defaults Flow Calibration The Flow Calibration submenu is used to calibrate the flow sensor to zero span or restore factory default values The flow calibration is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Flow Calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 77 Operation Service Menu DH pikari MAPA Calibrate Flow Zero The Calibrate Flow Zero screen calibrates the flow sensor at zero flow Note The pump must be disconnected before performing the zero calibration A e In the Main Menu choose Service gt Flow Calibration gt Zero DH pikari Eii MA Calibrate Flow Span The Calibrate Flow Span screen allows the user to view and set the flow sensor calibration span point Note An independent flow sensor is required to read the flow then the operator enters the flow value on this screen to perform the calibration A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Flow Calibration gt Span 3 78 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Restore Default Flow The Restore Default Flow Calibration screen allows the user to reset the Calibration flow calibration configuration val
103. Model 42i Instruction Manual Chemiluminescence NO NO NO Analyzer Part Number 101350 00 28Dec2007 CE Thermo O 2007 Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc All rights reserved Specifications terms and pricing are subject to change Not all products are available in all countries Please consult your local sales representative for details Thermo Fisher Scientific Air Quality Instruments 27 Forge Parkway Franklin MA 02038 1 508 520 0430 www thermo com aqi Thermo Fisher Scientific WEEE Compliance This product is required to comply with the European Union s Waste Electrical amp Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC It is marked with the following symbol Thermo Fisher Scientific has contracted with one or more recycling disposal companies in each EU Member State and this product should be disposed of or recycled through them Further information on Thermo Fisher Scientific s compliance with these Directives the recyclers in your country and information on Thermo Fisher Scientific products which may assist the detection of substances subject to the RoHS Directive are available at www thermo com WEEERoHS WEEE Compliance Thermo Fisher Scientific Reference Method Designation The Thermo Scientific Model 42 is designated by the United States Environmental Protection Agency US EPA as a Reference Method for the measurement of ambient concentrations of nitrogen dioxide pursuant with the requirements defin
104. NV OTA ES oat RN 3 58 Motherboard Voltar ds o iia 3 58 Interface Board MO id 3 59 THOR Board Y altas at tds 3 59 ACIP LATICES as 3 59 A E A E E auevteeuanes 3 60 o EAT TA oee eva late te Series Manga red 3s lan dadce sah 3 60 Analog Input Readings s o2 cy a Se et 3 61 Analog Inp t Voltages sc dees an ee Neate tears ste Ge 3 61 Digital Input is 3 61 Ro A ES cack tes 3 62 Test Analog Ottpuls iia inaani 3 62 Seta lo po tos dot 3 62 Instrument Configuration queda ns 3 63 Contact nto nto ea a 3 63 Alarms Meana ico 3 64 Internal Temperatura 3 64 Min and Max Internal Temperature LiMitS ooononnncnconnnnnnnnnnnno 3 65 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual vii Contents viii Model 42 Instruction Manual Chamber eniperature tapones 3 65 Min and Max Chamber Temperature Limits 0 0 cece 3 66 Cooler Temperature aida 3 66 Min and Max Cooler Temperature Limits ooncoocncononocnnnnincnnnnanoso 3 67 Converter Temperatura 3 67 Min and Max Converter Temperature Limits oooocnnnnonioninncnnnnnnos 3 67 Permeation Oven Gas Temperature scarico 3 68 Min and Max Permeation Oven Temperature Limits 3 68 PLOSSULE ssiiscasecca i npaesaexnusendiveseson thasentliis caupeasrcesausnseaseakerenMaassenaunes 3 69 Min and Max Pressure Limits postiar pts 3 69 A cate teat cena saad a tees at Sah ate occa tate teats 3 69 Min and Max Flow limits a 3 70 A E R R 3 70 Zero and Span Checker sass 3 71 Max Zero and
105. POWER_GOOD REAR PANEL AC AC INPUT 3 Cond Pl 2 Pin AC FRONT PANEL gt POWER SW r i PJ6 i i TRANSFORVIEF 3 Pin AAA 4 OVACA 240VAC led I CPTIONS I l Figure 6 1 Board Level Connection Diagram Common Electronics 6 6 Model 427 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific DATA I lt IPJ8 3 Pin PJ3 24 DC Troubleshooting Board Level Connection Diagrams L_ PMT ANODE INPUT BOARD nat J2 JI 2 Cond 10 Pin 7 Pin 2 Cond 4 Pin SAVPLEHON 5 Pin L zaonsw 3 Pin Zaar 2 Pin 4 Pin EJ _ AVBIENT THVP THEM 2 Pin LAO A ee me DS E 2 Pin Hostem PERM OVEN i HEATER 15V 1W PTa i 4 Pin BANANA i C NON sa 2 Pin amme 2 Pin 2 MPNA Pin zP Ll SpaRE1 SCL in ER L_ srare2 sa 2 Pin PANI FAN2 2 Pin 2 Pin i HP e ACT BENCHHEATER 60w ONA i DL CONVERTERHEATER 90W AC 2 Pin 2 eine C CONVERTER THEAVIOCOLALE 3 Pin A 3 Pin i PUMP Figure 6 2 Board Level Connection Diagram Measurement System Model 42 Instruction Manual 6 7 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Pin Descriptions 6 8 Model 42 Instruction Manual The connector pin descriptions in Table 6 3 through Table 6 9 can be used along with the board level connection diagrams to troubleshoot board level faults Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 8 Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions on pag
106. Permeation Rate by Weight Loss Determining Release Rate by Transfer Standard Thermo Fisher Scientific 7 Optional Equipment Internal Permeation Span Source Wait for the permeation gas temperature reading to stabilize Use the following procedure to determine the permeation rate by weight loss 10 Make sure the oven has been calibrated as described in the Permeation Tube Oven Calibration procedure described previously Insert the permeation tube carefully Do not touch with fingers Turn on the instrument Wait 24 48 hours for the permeation tube to stabilize Carefully remove the permeation tube from the oven and weigh to an accuracy of 0 1mg Perform this measurement as quickly as possible Replace the permeation tube into the oven of the instrument Repeat Steps 5 and 6 after two weeks Compute the weight loss of the permeation tube from the values determined in Steps 5 through 7 Repeat Steps 5 through 8 until the weight loss has been determined to a precision of 1 2 For the most accurate work use the permeation tube in the same oven that was used to determine the weight loss of permeation tube Use the following procedure to determine the release rate by transfer standard 1 Make sure the oven has been calibrated as described in the Permeation Tube Oven Calibration procedure described previously Also make sure that the Transfer Standard has been properly calibrated Model 42 Instruct
107. Span Os cee dtacteet Setar toot ache dead 3 71 Zero and Span Auto Calibration vsiisirmiatiaciia ne iii 3 71 NO NO and NO Concentration 3 72 Min and Max NO NO and NO Concentration Limits 3 72 Min A tecs vere eiaa sods a aE 3 73 Service Ments A miata mee wi a 3 73 PMT Voltage Adjustment nit bad 3 74 Range Mode Soles nr ai alada 3 74 Converter Set TenNipPETAUE nd da ii ind 3 75 Pressure CANDO a 3 75 Calibrate Pressure Zero unas a 3 76 Calibrate Pressure Span curia ia 3 76 Restore Default Pressure Calibration oonocnccnnnnnnnnnnccorennnnnon 3 77 Flow Calibration oaadd 3 77 Calibrate blow Zero ts dot E es 3 78 Calibrate Plow Span se da toas 3 78 Restore Default Flow Calibracion in 3 79 Input Board Calibre 3 79 Manual Input Calibration vinci ieee 3 79 Automatic Input Calibration 20 24 0021 dd 3 80 Input Frequency Disp radio ies 3 81 Temperature Calibrations aa ia dolio oo 3 81 Analog Output Calibration ses ii pl id 3 82 Analog Output Calibrate Zero oir ains 3 83 Analog Output Calibrate Full Scale oonoinnionionicnoninocconoreaconons 3 83 Analog Input Calibration siii aid 3 83 Analog Input Calibrate Lo ace 3 84 Analog Input Calibrate Full Scale cncinctda 3 84 Permeation Oven Settings ii iii 3 85 Calibrate Gas Lhermistor tacita 3 85 Water Batlioiinia ia a i a i S 3 86 O AE mis 3 86 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Calibrate Oven Thesis aca 3 86 Permeation Oven Selection
108. TTL level compatible and are pulled up within the analyzer The active state can be user defined in firmware Two serial ports allow daisy chaining so that multiple analyzers may be linked using one PC serial port The standard bi directional serial interface can be configured for either RS 232 or RS 485 The serial baud rate is user selectable in firmware for standard speeds from 1200 to 19 200 baud The user can also set the data bits parity and stop bits The following protocols are supported e C Link e Modbus Slave e Geysitech Bayern Hessen e Streaming Data The Streaming Data protocol transmits user selected measurement data via the serial port in real time for capture by a serial printer data logger or PC A null modem crossed cable is required when connecting the analyzer to an IBM Compatible PC However a straight cable one to one may be required when connecting the analyzer to other remote devices As a general rule when the connector of the host remote device is female a straight cable is required and when the connector is male a null modem cable is required Data Format 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 BAUD 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity All responses are terminated with a carriage return hex 0D Refer to Table 8 1 for the DB9 connector pin configuration Model 42 Instruction Manual 8 11 System Description 1 0 Components RS 485 Connection Ethernet Connection Exte
109. Table 3 3 Default Analog Outputs in Dual Range Mode Channel Connector Pin 1 0 Terminal Pin Description 1 14 1 NO High Range 2 33 3 NO Low Range 3 15 5 NO High Range 4 34 7 NO Low Range 5 17 9 NO High Range 6 36 11 NO Low Range Ground 16 18 19 35 37 2 4 6 8 10 12 Signal Ground Note All channels are user definable If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration the default selections my not apply A 3 10 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Range Menu Auto Range Mode The auto range mode switches the NO NO and NO analog outputs between high and low ranges depending on the NO concentration level The high and low ranges are defined in the Range menu For example suppose the low range is set to 50 ppb and the high range is set to 100 ppb Figure 3 6 Sample concentrations below 50 ppb are presented to the low ranges analog outputs and sample concentrations above 50 ppb are presented to the high ranges analog outputs When the low range is active the status output is at O volts When the high range is active the status output is at half of full scale When the high ranges are active the NO concentration must drop to 95 of the low NO range for the low ranges to become active In addition to each channel having two ranges each channel has two span coefficients There are two span coefficients so that each range can be calibrated separately
110. Temperature Compensation Ea a pe rT Ceo bet et ni mri Pressure compensation provides compensation for any changes to the instrument s output signal due to reaction chamber pressure variations The effects of reaction chamber pressure changes on the analyzer s subsystems and output have been empirically determined This empirical data is used to compensate for any change in reaction chamber pressure This compensation can be used even though the Model 427 does not require pressure compensation for EPA equivalency When pressure compensation is on the first line of the display represents the current pressure in the reaction chamber When pressure compensation is off the first line of the display shows the factory standard pressure of 150 mmHg e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Pressure Compensation Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 55 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Screen Contrast The Screen Contrast screen is used to change the contrast of the display Intensities between 0 and 100 in increments of 10 are available Changing the screen contrast may be necessary if the instrument is operated at extreme temperatures e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Screen Contrast Service Mode The Service Mode screen is used to turn the service mode on or off The service mode locks out any remote actions and includes parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing th
111. This allows the user to select the output signal to the selected output channel In dual or auto range mode HI or LO is displayed to indicate high or low concentrations Range NO is visible only in auto range mode The Concentrations screen is shown below See Table 3 8 below for a list of items for each signal group choice e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt Select Channel gt Choose Signal to Output Cu Co ibid 3 50 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Concentrations None Table 3 8 Signal Type Group Choices Other Measurements None Operation Instrument Controls Menu Analog Inputs None NO single auto range mode Internal Temp Analog Input 1 NO single auto range mode Chamber Temp Analog Input 2 NO single auto range mode Cooler Temp Analog Input 3 LO NO dual mode NO Converter Temp Analog Input 4 LO NO dual mode Perm Oven Gas Analog Input 5 LO NO dual mode Perm Oven Heater Analog Input 6 HI NO dual mode HI NO dual mode HI NO dual mode Chamber Pressure Flow PMT Volts Analog Input 7 Analog Input 8 Range NO auto range mode Ozonator Flow Analog Input Configuration The Analog Input Configuration menu displays a list of the 8 analog input channels available for configuration This screen is only displa
112. ace a string into the value field The value source which is the item or word number in the DATA ERec response appears next This is followed by an optional bitfield designator The datum identified by the value source can be printed as a string s hexadecimal x decimal d or floating point or binary b number Typically bitfield extractions are only done for decimal or hexadecimal numbers Floating point numbers can be followed with an optional precision specifier which will be used as an argument to printf s f format e g a field of 4 would be translated into the printf command of 3f can precede the precision specifier this Alternately the special character causes an indirection on the precision specifier which now becomes a field number This is useful when formatting for example numbers which have varying precision depending on the mode of the instrument Binary numbers can also have an optional precision specifier which is used to determine how many bits to print For example the specifier b4 will print the lowest four bits of the parsed number I here are serious restrictions on where an s field may appear currentl y y sources 1 and 2 must be s and no others may be s Model 42i Instruction Manual B 49 C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition Alarm Information Translation Table Selection Table Button Designator B 50 Model 42 Instruction Manual The val
113. ack includes mounting slides and retrofit front panel rack mounting handles Figure 9 4 Rack Mount Option Assembly Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 9 15 Optional Equipment Mounting Options 16 75 REF Figure 9 5 Bench Mounting 9 16 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Mounting Options 16 75 Figure 9 6 ElA Rack Mounting Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 9 17 Optional Equipment Mounting Options 16 75 Figure 9 7 Retrofit Rack Mounting 9 18 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix A Warranty Seller warrants that the Products will operate or perform substantially in conformance with Seller s published specifications and be free from defects in material and workmanship when subjected to normal proper and intended usage by properly trained personnel for the period of time set forth in the product documentation published specifications or package inserts Ifa period of time is not specified in Seller s product documentation published specifications or package inserts the warranty period shall be one 1 year from the date of shipment to Buyer for equipment and ninety 90 days for all other products the Warranty Period Seller agrees during the Warranty Period to repair or replace at Seller s option defective Products so as to cause the same to operate in sub
114. al modes have additional intervals of 1 2 and 5 seconds The background values for NO and NO which are corrected for temperature are subtracted from their respective averages The NO reading is corrected by the stored span factor and by the temperature factor The NO reading is partially corrected by the span factor temperature factor and balance factor The corrected NO value is subtracted from the partially corrected NO value to yield an uncorrected NO value The NO value is then corrected for converter efficiency to give a corrected NO reading Finally the corrected NO reading is added to the corrected NO reading to yield a fully corrected NO value The front panel display serial and Ethernet data ports and analog outputs are the means of communicating the results of the above calculations The front panel display presents the NO NO and NO concentrations simultaneously The display is updated every 1 10 seconds depending on the averaging time The analog output ranges are user selectable via software The analog outputs are defaulted based on the measurement range The defaults are calculated by dividing the data values by the full scale range for each of the three parameters and then multiplying each result by the user selected output range Negative concentrations can be represented as long as they are within 5 of full scale The zero and span values may be set by the user to any desired value Model 42 Instruction
115. al nox coef Sets auto calibrates NO coefficient B 26 cal perm gas offset Sets calibrates permeation gas temperature sensor offset B 28 res using a calibrating resistor in ohms cal perm gas offset Sets calibrates permeation gas temperature sensor offset to B 28 temp a temperature of degrees C cal perm oven offset Sets calibrates permeation oven temperature sensor offset B 29 res using a calibrating resistor in ohms cal pres Sets current measured pressure as pressure during B 29 calibration for pressure compensation clr lrecs Clears away only long records that have been saved B 17 clr records Clears away all logging records that have been saved B 17 clr srecs Clears away only short records that have been saved B 17 contrast Reports sets current screen contrast B 35 conv set temp Reports sets temperature setpoint for NO converter B 36 conv temp Reports current NO converter temperature B 10 cooler temp Reports temperature of PMT cooler same as PMT B 11 temperature copy Irec to sp Sets copies current Irec selection into the scratch pad B 24 copy sp to Irec Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into Irec list B 24 copy sp to srec Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into srec list B 24 copy sp to stream Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into stream list B 24 copy srec to sp Sets copies current srec selection into the scratch pad B 24 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands
116. alled A The Concentrations screen allows the user to select the output signal that is tied to the selected field item The selected item is shown by lt after it Note that at this point pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below Range NO is visible only in auto range mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt Select Field gt Concentrations The Other Measurements screen allows the user to select the output signal that is tied to the selected field item The selected item is shown by lt after it Items displayed are determined by the options installed Note that at this point pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt Select Field gt Other Measurements Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Analog Inputs The Analog Inputs screen allows the user to select the output signal none or analog inputs 1 8 that is tied to the selected field item The selected item is shown by lt after it Note that at this point pressing indicates that these a
117. alogging Settings gt Erase Log 3 30 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu qu mTOR gH eb nv A Pi EE EE El Cited Select Content The Select Content submenu displays a list of 32 record fields to use and a submenu list of the analog output signal group choices to choose from Choices are Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board is installed This is a temporary list of items for the selected record type that must be committed via the datalogging menu before the changes will apply Note that committing any changes to this list will erase all currently logged data as the format of the stored data is changed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content Pi E Cdra MT WH hiv PS a E L Py AG ane Choose Item Type The Choose Item Type submenu displays a list of data that can be logged for the current field Choices are Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt Field 1 32 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 31 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Concentrations Other Measurements 3 32 Model 42 Instruction Manual Note The ANALOG INPUTS item is only displayed if the I O Expansion Board option is inst
118. am through a reacting bed Such agents as CrO on an alumina support or Purafil are very efficient at oxidizing NO to NO2 The chemical contact approach has the advantage of needing no electrical power input for its application Scrubbing Fixed bed reactors are commonly used in the last step of zero air generation to remove the remaining contaminants by either further reaction or absorption Table 4 1 lists materials that can be effective in removing contaminants Table 4 1 Scrubbing Materials To Remove Use NO Soda Lime 6 12 mesh Purafil Hydrocarbons Molecular Sieve 4A Activated Charcoal 0 and SO Activated Charcoal 4 2 Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Gas Phase Titrator Flow Controllers Pressure Regulator ZERO AIR Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Equipment Required A gas phase titrator GPT such as is included in the Thermo Scientific Model 146 Series Multigas Calibration System is used to generate NO2 concentrations from NO concentrations Figure 4 1 shows the suggested placement of the component parts of a gas phase titration apparatus Equipment Damage All connections between components in the system should be made with glass Teflon or other non reactive material A The airflow controllers should be devices capable of maintaining constant airflows within 2 of the required flow rate The NO flow controller should be capable of maintaining constant NO flows within
119. analog digital outputs to a strip chart recorder s or PC s Calibration The following procedure calibrates the analyzer using the gas phase titrator and zero gas generator described previously in this manual It is suggested that a calibration curve have at least seven points between the zero and full scale NO concentrations Although the seven point curve is optional two of whatever number of points is chosen should be located at the zero and 90 levels and the remaining points equally spaced between these values Note When the instrument is equipped with internal zero span and sample valves the ZERO and SPAN ports should give identical responses to the SAMPLE port when test gases are introduced The user should calibrate the instrument using the SAMPLE port to introduce the zero and span gas sources A After calibration the zero and span sources should be plumbed to the appropriate ports on the rear panel of the instrument and then reintroduced to the instrument The instrument should give identical responses to the test gases whether they are introduced via the SAMPLE port or the ZERO or SPAN ports If not the plumbing and or valves should be serviced Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 4 9 Calibration Calibration Connect GPT Apparatus to the Analyzer Adjust Instrument Gain Set NO and NO Background to Zero 4 10 Model 42 Instruction Manual Use the following procedure to connect the GPT apparatus t
120. ange and Auto Range Mode Calibrate High NO 4 20 Model 42 Instruction Manual 4 Press gt to return to the Run screen Use the following procedure to calibrate the NO channel to the NO calibration gas Adjust the O generator in the GPT system to generate sufficient Oz to produce a decrease in the high NO concentration equivalent to about 80 of the URL of the high NO range The decrease must not exceed 90 of the high NO concentration determined in the Calibrate High NO procedure From the Main Menu choose Calibration gt Cal Hi NO2 Coefficient The Hi NO field displays the current NO concentration The Hi NO Span Conc field is where you enter the high NO calibration gas concentration Set the high NO calibration gas concentration to reflect the sum of the NO concentration generated by GPT and any NO impurity Use e to move the cursor left and right and use Ce to increment and decrement the numeric character at the cursor Press to calculate and save the new high NO coefficient based on the entered span concentration You can change the calibration factors by using the Calibration Factors menu This is often useful in a troubleshooting situation However after the above calibration procedure is completed all subsequent data reduction depends on the calibration parameters remaining the same as during the initial calibration Therefore never change any calibration factor without fir
121. arately When calibrating the instrument in dual or auto range be sure to use a low span gas to calibrate the low range and a high span gas to calibrate the high range Whether dual or singe range the first step in calibrating the instrument is to assign the calibration pressure The calibration pressure is used to account for slight pressure fluctuation brought on by changing weather The calibration pressure is set equal to the reactor pressure at the time of calibration For more information about calibration see Chapter 4 Calibration e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 21 Operation Calibration Menu Calibrate NO and NO The Calibrate NO and NO Background screens are used to adjust the Backgrounds background or perform a zero calibration Be sure the analyzer samples zero air until the readings stabilize The display shows the current NO or NO reading It is important to note the averaging time when calibrating The longer the averaging time the more accurate the calibration will be To be most accurate use the 300 second averaging time For more information about calibration see Chapter 4 Calibration e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibrate NO or NOx Background Calibrate NO NO and The Calibrate NO Coefficient screen is used to adjust the NO span NO Coefficients concentration while sampling span gas of known concentrati
122. atches the Instrument Address and the command is terminated with either lt CR gt with no checksum or lt ETX gt followed by the correct checksum lt BCC gt D 4 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol Geysitech Commands Sample Data Reply String in response to Data Query Command DA In response to a valid data query command DA the instrument responds in the following format lt STX gt MD02 lt SP gt lt address gt lt SP gt lt measured valuel gt lt SP gt lt status gt lt SP gt lt SFKT gt lt SP gt lt address 1 gt lt SP gt lt measured value2 gt lt SP gt lt status gt lt SP gt lt SFKT gt lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The response uses the same command terminators as used by the received command i e if the received command was terminated with a lt CR gt the response is terminated with lt CR gt and if the command was terminated with a lt ETX gt lt BCC gt the response is terminated with lt ETX gt and the computed checksum lt BCC gt The 02 after the MD indicates that two measurements are present in the reply string a 03 for three measurements and so on this will also determine the length of the reply string lt address gt is the Instrument Address Each subsequent measurement attached to the response will have the lt address X gt where X keeps incrementing by 1 for each measurement included lt measured value gt is the concentrat
123. ation Parameters on page D 2 Instrument Address on page D 2 Abbreviations Used on page D 2 Basic Command Structure on page D 2 Block Checksum on page D 3 Geysitech Commands on page D 3 The following are the communication parameters that are used to configure the serial port of the Series to support Geysitech protocol Number of Data bits 8 Number of Stop bits 1 Parity None Data rate from 1200 115200 Baud 9600 is default Model 427 Instruction Manual D 1 Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol TCP Communication Parameters TCP Communication Parameters Instrument Address Abbreviations Used Basic Command Structure D 2 Model 42 Instruction Manual iSeries Instruments support the Geysitech TCP protocol over TCP IP The register definition is the same as for the serial interface TCP connection port for Geysitech 9882 The Geysitech instrument address has a value between 0 and 127 and is represented by 3 digit ASCII number with leading zeros or leading spaces if required e g Instrument address of 1 is represented as 001 or lt SP gt lt SP gt 1 The instrument Address is the same as the Instrument ID used for C Link and MODBUS commands This can be set via the front panel The Instrument Address is represented by lt address gt in the examples throughout this document Note Device IDs 128 through 247 are not supported because of limitations imposed by the C Link protocol A T
124. ation of the instrument Note If the analyzer is in service mode pressing on the item will toggle it yes or no with the exception of purchased options such as dilution and auto calibration A e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Instrument Configuration Eo bet mid Contact Information The Contact Information screen displays the customer service information e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Contact Information Ea PELAR es por mi ak ni Load dr Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 63 Operation Alarms Menu Alarms Menu The alarms menu displays a list of items that are monitored by the analyzer If the item being monitored goes outside the lower or upper limit the status of that item will go from OK to either LOW or HIGH respectively If the alarm is not a level alarm the status will go from OK to FAIL The number of alarms detected is displayed to indicate how many alarms have occurred If no alarms are detected the number zero is displayed To see the actual reading of an item and its minimum and maximum limits move the cursor to the item and press e Items displayed are determined by the options installed The zero span check and auto calibration screens are visible only if the zero span check or auto calibration options are enabled The perm oven temperature screen is visible only if the perm oven option is installed The motherboard
125. bing connections to facilitate re connection 4 Pull solenoid valve from mounting clip 5 To replace solenoid follow previous steps in reverse Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Ozonator Assembly Replacement 6 Re install the measurement bench Refer to Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter Figure 7 11 Replacing the Solenoid Valve Ozonator Assembly Use the following procedure to replace the ozonator assembly Figure 7 Replacement Equipment Required Ozonator assembly Wrench 5 8 inch Philips screwdriver f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Refer to Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter to lower the partition panel then proceed to the next step below Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 7 21 Servicing Ozonator Assembly Replacement 2 Carefully disconnect the plumbing at the glass inlet and outlet of the ozonator 3 Disconnect the stainless steel tubing from the flow transducer 4 Loosen the four captive screws securing the ozonator bracket to the floor plate Flow Transducer Captive Screws 4 Ozonator Bracket Screws 2 Ozonator Ozonator Transformer Screws 4
126. ble pump by following above procedure in reverse Refer to the marks you made in Step three to position the components Make sure not to over tighten clamping disk Be sure that the Teflon side of diaphragm faces up and that the flapper valves cover the holes of the top and bottom plate Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 5 7 Preventive Maintenance Pump Rebuilding 8 Re install the cover reconnect the power cord and turn the instrument ON 9 Check that the reaction chamber pressure reads between 150 and 250 mmHg 5 8 Model 427 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Safety Precautions Troubleshooting Thermo Fisher Scientific Guides Chapter 6 Troubleshooting This instrument has been designed to achieve a high level of reliability In the event of problems or failure the troubleshooting guidelines board level connection diagrams connector pin descriptions and testing procedures presented in this chapter should be helpful in isolating and identifying problems For additional fault location information refer to the Preventive Maintenance chapter in this manual The service mode in the Operation chapter includes parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing problems The Technical Support Department at Thermo Fisher Scientific can also be consulted in the event of problems See Service Locations on page 6 21 for contact information In any
127. ble to reach 2 Turn on the power to the water bath Using an NIST traceable thermometer with a resolution of 0 01 C adjust the water bath to 45 iE 3 In the Main Menu choose Service gt Perm Oven Settings gt Cal Gas Thermistor gt Water Bath Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 9 7 Optional Equipment Internal Permeation Span Source Setting Temperature with Known Resistance 9 8 Model 427 Instruction Manual 4 Enter the thermistor temperature from the thermometer and press ED 5 Remove the thermistor from the water bath dry and replace into the permeation tube oven 6 Make sure the source of zero air is connected to the ZERO bulkhead on the rear panel 7 Wait for the permeation gas temperature reading to stabilize Use the following procedure to set the gas temperature with an accurate known resistance 1 Remove the thermistor from POJ1 on the measurement interface board 2 Connect a 4 369 KQ resistor across pins 1 and 2 of POJ1 use a resistance substitution box and an accurate meter if necessary 3 In the Main Menu choose Service gt Perm Oven Settings gt Cal Gas Thermistor gt Known Resistor 4 Enter the exact value of the attached resistor and press to save the offset 5 Remove the resistor and reconnect the gas thermistor 6 Make sure the source of zero air is connected to the ZERO bulkhead on the rear panel Thermo Fisher Scientific Determining
128. brate Oven Thermistor screen is used to view and set the permeation oven thermistor resistance to a known resistor value e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Perm Oven Settings gt Cal Oven Thermistor 3 86 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Permeation Oven Selection The Permeation Oven Setpoint screen is used to select the permeation oven state to not present or the desired temperature choice of 30 35 and 45 C e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Perm Oven Settings gt Perm Oven Selection POE PF med Fooss Factory Calibrate Gas Thermistor The Factory Calibrate Gas Thermistor menu is used for calibrating the permeation oven gas thermistor to either low point high point or set defaults e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Perm Oven Settings gt Factory Cal Gas Therm Wi nyirpri Low and High Points The Calibrate Gas Thermistor Low Point screen is used to view and set the permeation oven thermistor resistance The low and high point screens function the same way Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 87 Operation Service Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Perm Oven Settings gt Factory Cal Gas Therm gt Low or High Point DH pikari ML Set Defaults The Set Defaults screen is used to reset the configuration values to factory defaults e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Perm Oven Settings gt
129. c data B 22 flags Reports 8 hexadecimal digits or flags that represent the B 12 status of the ozonator PMT gas mode and alarms flow Reports current measured sample flow in LPM B 11 format Reports sets current reply termination format B 41 gas mode Reports current mode of sample zero or span B 33 gas unit Reports sets current gas units B 34 he help Simulates pressing help pushbutton B 29 high avg time Reports sets high range averaging time B 9 high no Reports NO concentration calculated with high range B 10 coefficients Model 42 Instruction Manual B 5 C Link Protocol Commands Commands B 6 Model 42 Instruction Manual Command Description Page high no coef Reports sets high range NO coefficients B 26 high no gas Reports sets high range NO span gas concentration B 27 high no2 Reports NO concentration calculated with high range B 10 coefficients high no2 coef Reports sets high range NO coefficients B 26 high no2 gas Reports sets high range NO span gas concentration B 27 high nox Reports NO concentration calculated with high range B 10 coefficients high nox coef Reports sets high range NO coefficients B 26 high nox gas Reports sets high range NO span gas concentration B 27 high range no Reports selects current NO high range B 31 high range no2 Reports selects current NO high range B 31 high range nox Reports selects current NO high range B 3
130. cceptable alarm limits range from 300 to 700 C The actual alarm setpoints should be set for the installed converter Ifthe converter temperature reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated The word ALARM appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Converter Temp prih ET Min and Max Converter The Minimum Converter Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change Temperature Limits the minimum converter temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum converter temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Converter Temp gt Min or Max Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 67 Operation Alarms Menu ep guided PLP Permeation Oven Gas The Permeation Oven Gas Temperature screen displays the current Temperatu re permeation oven gas temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 25 00 to 50 00 C If the temperature reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated The word ALARM appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Perm Gas Temp ip priori ML PRA Min and Max Permeation Oven The Minimum Permeation Oven Gas Temperature alarm limit screen is Temperature Limits used to change the minimum temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum perm
131. ce gt Analog Out Calibration gt Select Channel gt Calibrate Full Scale PR Ea DHAN ESA RATE mid La The Analog Input Calibration menu is a selection of 8 analog inputs if the I O expansion board option is installed to calibrate and allows the user to select the calibration action zero or span The analog input calibration is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 83 Operation Service Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Calibration Analog Input Calibrate The Analog Input Calibrate Zero screen allows the user to calibrate the Zero zero state of the selected analog input e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Calibration gt Select Channel gt Calibrate Zero Hook up a voltage source of 0 V to the analog input channel Analog Input Calibrate The Analog Input Calibration Full Scale screen allows the user to calibrate Full Scale the full scale state of the selected analog input e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Calibration gt Select Channel gt Calibrate Full Scale Hook up a voltage source of 10 V to the analog input channel 3 84 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Permeation Oven Sett
132. cement procedure in this chapter 3 Disconnect the digital output board ribbon cable from the motherboard 4 Using the nut driver remove the two standoffs securing the board to the rear panel Figure 7 19 5 Pop off the digital output board from the mounting studs and remove the board 6 To install the digital output board follow previous steps in reverse Use the following procedure to replace the motherboard Figure 7 18 Equipment Required Motherboard Philips screwdriver Nut driver 3 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Model 42 Instruction Manual 7 39 Servicing Measurement Interface Board Replacement 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the I O expansion board optional if used See the I O Expansion Board Replacement procedure in this chapter 3 Remove the digital output board See the Digital Output Board Replacement procedure in this chapter 4 Unplug all connectors from the motherboard Note connector locations to facilitate reconnection 5 Using the nut driver remove the eight standoffs securing the board to the rear panel 6 Pop off the motherboard from motherboard support bracket and remove the motherboard 7 To install the motherboard follow previous steps in rev
133. chamber connector from the temperature control board 3 Snap off the temperature control board from the board mounts 4 Remove the four screws securing the cooler shroud to the rear panel and remove the shroud Cooler Shroud Reaction Chamber To COOLER on Measurement Interface Board To BENCH on Temp Control Board Captive Screws 4 Two Not Shown To PMT HVPS BNC Connector to Input Board Figure 7 6 PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber 5 Disconnect plumbing connections from the reaction chamber 7 12 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Photomultiplier Tube Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific A Servicing Photomultiplier Tube Replacement 6 Disconnect the cables from the PMT high voltage power supply the input board and the measurement interface board Remove all tie wraps securing the cables 7 Loosen four captive screws holding cooler to floor plate and remove the cooler assembly with the reaction chamber Note If only the cooler is being replaced remove the PMT and reaction chamber from the old cooler and install them on the new cooler A 8 Install new cooler by following previous steps in reverse Note Fasten knurled fittings on reaction chamber finger tight A Make sure that the heat shrink covered tubing between the reaction chamber and the converter is light tight at the connections A 9 Re install the measurement bench Refer to Removing the Measureme
134. chemiluminescence analyzers are inherently linear over a wide dynamic range and under normal USEPA compliance situations this feature is not required Dual calibration may be used for span levels less than a factor of 10 apart however if this is done to correct for a significant non linearity it may mask the problems causing the effect such as bad calibration cylinder leaks in sampling lines or low ozonator output Use the following procedures to calibrate the analyzer in dual or auto range mode Use the following procedure to set the NO and NO background readings to zero Both the Set NO background and NO background screens operate the same way and the following procedure also applies to the NO and NO background screen For detailed information about the menu parameters and the icons used in these procedures see the Operation chapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibrate Low NO Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration in Dual Range and Auto Range Mode 1 Follow the Pre Calibration procedure described previously in this chapter 2 Introduce zero air to the SAMPLE bulkhead and allow the analyzer to sample zero air until the NO NO and NO responses stabilize 3 When the responses stabilize from the Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibrate NO Background 4 The Set NO Background screen displays the current NO background and NO concentration 5 Press to set the NO background to zero 6 Pr
135. cludes eight analog voltage inputs These inputs are used to gather measurement data from third party devices such as meteorological equipment The user may assign a label unit and a voltage to user defined unit conversion table up to 16 points All voltage inputs have a resolution of 12 bits over the range of 0 to 10 volts The instrument includes one power fail relay on motherboard and ten digital output relays on the digital output board These are reed relays rated for at least 500 mA 200VDC The power fail relay is Form C both normally opened and normally closed contacts All other relays are Form A normally opened contacts and are used to provide alarm status and mode information from the analyzer as well as remote control to other devices such as for controlling valves during calibration The user may select what information is sent out each relay and whether the active state is opened or closed Sixteen digital inputs are available which may be programmed to signal instrument modes and special conditions including e NO Measure Mode e NO Measure Mode e Zero Gas Mode e Span Gas Mode e Set Background Thermo Fisher Scientific Serial Ports RS 232 Connection Thermo Fisher Scientific System Description 1 0 Components e Cal to low span e Cal to high span e Analog outputs to zero e Analog outputs to full scale The actual use of these inputs will vary based on analyzer configuration The digital inputs are
136. codes for pins 1 25 are for 25 pin cables color codes for pins 1 37 are for 37 pin cables A Table 9 1 Cable Options Description Cable Length DB37M to open end Six feet DB37F to open end Six feet DB25M to open end Six feet RS 232 Table 9 2 Color Codes for 25 Pin and 37 Pin Cables Pin Color Pin Color 1 BLACK 20 RED BLACK 2 BROWN 21 ORANGE BLACK 3 RED 22 YELLOW BLACK 4 ORANGE 23 GREEN BLACK 5 YELLOW 24 GRAY BLACK 6 GREEN 25 PINK BLACK 7 BLUE End color codes for 25 pin cables continue for 37 pin cables 8 VIOLET 26 PINK GREEN 9 GRAY 27 PIND RED 19 WHITE 28 PINK VIOLET 11 PINK 29 LIGHT BLUE 12 LIGHT GREEN 30 LIGHT BLUE BROWN 13 BLACK WHITE 31 LIGHT BLUE RED 14 BROWN WHITE 32 LIGHT BLUE VIOLET 15 RED WHITE 33 LIGHT BLUE BLACK 16 ORANGE WHITE 34 GRAY GREEN 17 GREEN WHITE 35 GRAY RED 18 BLUE WHITE 36 GRAY VIOLET 19 VIOLET WHITE 37 LIGHT GREEN BLACK Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Mounting Options Mountin 0 tions The analyzer can be installed in the configuration described in Table 9 3 y 8 and shown in Figure 9 4 through Figure 9 7 Table 9 3 Mounting Options Mounting Type Description Bench Positioned on bench includes mounting feet and front panel side trim handles EIA rack Mounted in an ElA style rack includes mounting slides and front panel ElA rack mounting handles Retrofit rack Mounted in a Thermo non ElA r
137. conc no Reports sets current NO concentration alarm warning value B 16 alarm trig conc no2 Reports sets current NO concentration alarm warning value B 16 alarm trig conc nox Reports sets current NO concentration alarm warning value B 16 analog out range Reports analog current output range per channel B 42 analog vin Retrieves analog voltage input data per channel B 43 analog vout range Reports analog voltage output range per channel B 43 avg time Reports sets averaging time B 9 Model 42 Instruction Manual B 3 C Link Protocol Commands Commands B 4 Model 42 Instruction Manual Command Description Page baud Reports sets current baud rate B 40 bkg no Reports sets current NO background B 28 bkg nox Reports sets current NO background B 28 cal high no coef Sets auto calibrates high range NO coefficient B 26 cal high no2 coef Sets auto calibrates high range NO coefficient B 26 cal high nox coef Sets auto calibrates high range NO coefficient B 26 cal low no coef Sets auto calibrates low range NO coefficient B 26 cal low no2 coef Sets auto calibrates low range NO coefficient B 26 cal low nox coef Sets auto calibrates low range NO coefficient B 26 cal no bkg Sets auto calibrates NO background B 25 cal no coef Sets auto calibrates NO coefficient B 26 cal no2 coef Sets auto calibrates NO coefficient B 26 cal nox bkg Sets auto calibrates NO background B 25 c
138. correspondence with the factory please note both the serial number and program number of the instrument This chapter provides the following troubleshooting and service support information e Safety Precautions on page 6 1 e Troubleshooting Guides on page 6 1 e Board Level Connection Diagrams on page 6 6 e Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 8 e Service Locations on page 6 21 Read the safety precautions in the Preface and Servicing chapter before performing any actions listed in this chapter The troubleshooting guides presented in this chapter are designed to help isolate and identify instrument problems Table 6 1 provides general troubleshooting information and indicates the checks that you should perform if you experience an instrument problem Model 42 Instruction Manual 6 1 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Table 6 2 lists all the alarm messages you may see on the graphics display and provides recommendations about how to resolve the alarm condition See Alarms Menu in the Operation chapter for detailed information Table 6 1 Troubleshooting General Guide Malfunction Does not start up Possible Cause No power Power Supply Action Check that the instrument is plugged into the proper source 115 or 220 VAC 50 or 60H23 Check instrument fuses Check voltages using a digital voltmeter No output signal or very low output No sample
139. creen This command is meant for backward compatibility on the C series Screen information is reported using the iscreen command above Send screen Receive screen This is an I series Instrument Screen Information not available Measurement es o range no2 Configuration range nox high range no high range no2 high range nox low range no low range no2 low range nox These commands report NO NO and NO range in single range mode or the high and low ranges in dual or auto range mode If the mode is incorrect the instrument responds with can t wrong settings The example below reports that the NO full scale range is set to 50 ppb according to Table B 6 and Table B 7 Send range no Receive range no 0 5000E 2 ppb set range Selection set high range Selection set low range Selection These commands select the NO NO and NO full scale ranges according to Table B 6 and Table B 7 The example below sets the NO full scale range to 2 000 ppb Send set range 5 Receive set range 5 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual B 31 C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration B 32 Model 42 Instruction Manual Table B 6 Standard Ranges Selection ppb ppm pgm mgm 0 50 0 05 100 0 1 1 100 0 10 200 0 2 2 200 0 20 500 0 5 3 500 0 50 1 000 1 0 4 1 000 1 00 2 000 2 0 5 2 000 2 00 5 000 5 0 6 5 000 5 00 10 000
140. d Small flat blade screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect all connectors from the temperature control board Use a small flat blade screwdriver to loosen the two screws securing the CONV TC cable Note that the red wire is towards the rear and the yellow wire is towards the front 3 Snap off the board from the board mounts 4 To install the temperature control board follow previous steps in reverse Thermo Fisher Scientific Ambient Temperature Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Servicing Ambient Temperature Calibration Use the following procedure to calibrate the ambient internal temperature for the instrument Equipment Required Calibrated thermometer or 10K 1 Resistor WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives 4 If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Remove the instrument cover 2 Tape the thermistor plug
141. der in subsequent bytes If the returned output quantity is not a multiple of eight the remaining bits in the final data byte will be padded with zeros toward the high order end of the byte The Byte Count field specifies the quantity of complete bytes of data Note The values reported may not reflect the state of the actual relays in the instrument as the user may program these outputs for either active closed or open A Request Function code 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument Quantity of outputs 2 Bytes 1 to maximum allowed by instrument Unit Identifier 1 Byte 0x00 to OxFF Passed back in response Response Function code 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02 Byte count 1 Byte N Output Status n Byte N N or N 1 N Quantity of Outputs 8 if the remainder not equal to zero then N N 1 Error Response Function code 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02 Exception code 1 Byte 01 IIlegal Function 02 Illegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Here is an example of a request and response to read outputs 2 15 Thermo Fisher Scientific 0x03 0x04 Read Holding Registers Read Input Thermo Fisher Scientific Registers MODBUS Protocol Function Codes Request Field Name Hex Function 0x01 Starting Address Hi 0x00 Starting Address Lo 0x02 Quantity of Outputs Hi 0x00 Quantity of Outputs Lo 0x0D Response Field Name Hex Function 0x01 Byte Count 0x03 Output Status 2 10 OxCD Outp
142. described in the Calibration chapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 2 9 Chapter 3 Operation This chapter describes the front panel display front panel pushbuttons and menu driven software For details see the following topics e Display on page 3 1 e Pushbuttons on page 3 2 e Software Overview on page 3 4 e Range Menu on page 3 8 e Averaging Time on page 3 16 e Calibration Factors Menu on page 3 17 e Calibration Menu on page 3 21 e Instrument Controls Menu on page 3 26 e Diagnostics Menu on page 3 57 e Alarms Menu on page 3 64 e Service Menu on page 3 73 e Password Menu on page 3 91 Display The 320 x 240 graphics liquid crystal display LCD shows the sample concentrations instrument parameters instrument controls help and error messages Some menus contain more items than can be displayed at one time For these menus use _ and 4 to move the cursor up and down to each item Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 1 Operation Pushbuttons gt 3 0 Figure 3 1 Front Panel Display CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks do not to let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Pushbutto nS The Pushbuttons allow the user to traverse the various screens menus Figure 3 2 Front
143. digits are displayed to the right of the decimal from 0 to 6 with a default of 2 e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt Select Channel gt Decimal Places EUs EEE TE aaa ETET Fad Number of Table Points The Number of Table Points screen allows the user to select how many points are used in the conversion table The points range from 2 to 10 with a default of 2 e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt Select Channel gt Table Points eer PPP LES mild be i opi Baek e PE EE E Table Point The Table Point submenu allows the user to set up an individual table point e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt Select Channel gt Point 1 10 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual 3 53 Operation Instrument Controls Menu ERED CHA Pi Tapa DH Cid E POEP TE ad Bone PME TY Saad Haat ake POE ae e Pi EE EE Volts The Volts screen allows the user to set the input voltage for the selected table point in the conversion table from 0 00 to 10 50 The default table is a two point table with point 1 0 00 V 000 0 U and point 2 10 00 V 10 0 U e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt Select Channel gt Select Point gt Volts A A EE EE User Value Th
144. dress Hi 00 Output Address Lo 05 Output Value Hi FF Output Value Lo 00 The following Table C 1 through Table C 3 lists the MODBUS parameters supported for the Model 42i Table C 1 Read Coils for 427 Coil Number Status 1 AUTORANGE NOx 2 LOCAL REMOTE 3 SERVICE 4 UNITS 5 ZERO MODE 6 SPAN MODE 7 NO MODE 8 NOx MODE 9 NOT USED 10 NOT USED 11 GEN ALARM 12 NO CONC MAX ALARM Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported Coil Number Status 13 NO CONC MIN ALARM 14 NO2 CONC MAX ALARM 15 NO2 CONC MIN ALARM 16 NOx CONC MAX ALARM 17 NOx CONC MIN ALARM 18 NOT USED 19 NOT USED 20 NOT USED 21 NOT USED 22 INT TEMP ALARM 23 CHAMB TEMP ALARM 24 COOLER TEMP ALARM 25 NO2 CONVERTER TEMP ALARM 26 NOT USED 27 PERM OVEN GAS TEMP ALARM 28 PRESSURE ALARM 29 FLOW ALARM 30 OZONE FLOW ALARM 31 MOTHERBOARD STATUS ALARM 32 INTERFACE BD STATUS ALARM 33 1 0 EXP BD STATUS ALARM 34 NOT USED 35 CONC ALARM 36 SAMPLE MODE 37 PURGE MODE 38 NOT USED 39 ZERO CHECK CAL ALARM 40 SPAN CHECK CAL ALARM Table C 2 Read Registers for 42i Register Number Variable 40001 amp 40002 NO 40003 amp 40004 N02 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual C 9 MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported C 10 Model 42 Instruction Manual
145. e Communication Protocol The Communication Protocol screen is used to change the instrument communication protocol for serial communications e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Communication Protocol POE ik bet DN EEE TE aa i Streaming Data Configuration The Streaming Data Configuration menu is used to allow for configuration of the 8 streaming data output items streaming interval current data format and current timestamp setting The Choose Item Signal submenu displays a list of the analog output signal group choices to choose from Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 37 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Choices are Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board option is installed Note Add Labels Prepend Timestamp and Add Flags are toggle items that change between yes or no when selected A e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config E Pri Streaming Data Interval The Streaming Data Interval screen is used to adjust the streaming data interval The following interval times are available 1 2 5 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 and 300 seconds e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Streaming Data Interval 3 38 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Cho
146. e Model 427 For more information about the service mode see Service Menu later in this chapter Note The service mode should be turned off when finished as it prevents remote operation A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Service Mode 3 56 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu PR Ea RT WH mri ee PE EEE E Date Time The Date Time screen allows the user to view and change the system date and time 24 hour format The internal clock is powered by its own battery when instrument power is off e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Date Time DH piispri E a E i Diagnostics Menu The Diagnostics menu provides access to diagnostic information and functions This menu is useful when troubleshooting the instrument The analog input readings and analog input voltages are only displayed if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Wi papi MPA Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 57 Operation Diagnostics Menu Program Version Voltages Motherboard Voltages 3 58 Model 42 Instruction Manual The Program Version screen read only shows the version number of the program installed Prior to contacting the factory with any questions regarding the instrument please note the product model name and program version number e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnost
147. e below sets the converter temperature alarm maximum value to 340 0 C Send set alarm converter temp max 340 Receive set alarm converter temp max 340 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Alarms alarm cooler temp min alarm cooler temp max These commands report the cooler temperature alarm minimum and maximum value current settings The example below reports that the cooler temperature alarm minimum value is 10 0 C Send alarm cooler temp min Receive alarm cooler temp min 10 0 deg C set alarm cooler temp min value set alarm cooler temp max value These commands set the cooler temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing cooler temperature alarm limits in degrees C The example below sets the cooler temperature alarm maximum value to 2 0 C Send set alarm cooler temp max 2 0 Receive set alarm cooler temp max 2 0 ok alarm internal temp min alarm internal temp max These commands report the internal temperature alarm minimum and maximum value current settings The example below reports that the internal temperature alarm minimum value is 15 0 C Send internal temp alarm min Receive internal temp alarm min 15 0 deg C set internal temp alarm min value set internal temp alarm max value These commands set the internal temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing interna
148. e 12 01 04 Receive set date 12 01 04 ok set default params This command sets all the parameters to their default values This does not affect the factory calibrated parameters Send set default params Receive set default params ok ozonator This command reports the ozonator is on or off The example below reports that the ozonator is on Send ozonator Receive ozonator on set ozonator onoff These commands set the ozonator on or off The example below sets the ozonator off Send set ozonator off Receive set ozonator off ok ozonator flow This command reports the current ozonator flow The example below reports that the current ozonator flow is 0 050 LPM Send ozonator flow Receive ozonator flow 0 050 1 m ozonator safety This command reports the status of the ozonator safety on or off The example below reports that the ozonator safety is on Send ozonator safety Receive ozonator safety on set ozonator safety onoff These commands set the ozonator safety on or off The example below sets the ozonator safety off Model 42 Instruction Manual B 37 C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration B 38 Model 42 Instruction Manual Send set ozonator safety off Receive set ozonator safety off ok ozonator status This command reports the status of the ozonator and safety The example below reports that the ozonator is off Send ozonator status Receive ozonator status off pmt status This command repo
149. e 6 13 Front Panel Board Connector Pin Diagram on page 6 15 I O Expansion Board Optional Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 17 Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 18 Input Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 20 Temperature Control Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 20 Table 6 3 Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator INTF DATA J1 1 Ground RS485 to Interface Board RS485 to Interface Board w N 10 BASE T J2 Ethernet Output Ethernet Output Ethernet Input NC NC Ethernet Input NC NC 5V 24V 24V co N oo A WO N EXPANSION BD J3 Ground Ground Ground YN Oo om A 0 N RS485 to Expansion Board Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Pin Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description RS485 to Expansion Board SPARE DATA J4 gt mo N OQO wo A WO N 5V 24V 24V Ground Ground Ground RS485 to Spare Board RS485 to Spare Board 1 0 J5 o 0 N OQO o A wo N gt gt gt o gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt co loo N o a au N N N N N N N on F O N gt O Power Fail Relay N C Contact Ground TTL Input 1 TTL Input 2 Ground TTL Input 5 TTL Input 7 TTL Input 8 TTL Input 10 Ground TTL Input 1
150. e Control Board Connector Pin Descriptions 6 20 Table 7 1 Model 42i Replacement Parts oooccococococcccincncocinnnnncnncnrnnnnnncoranonoos 7 4 Fable 7 2 Model 427 CableS coi iia 7 6 Table 7 3 External Device Connection Component ococonininccnccninicucninncnnoso 7 6 Table 7 4 Analog Output Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections 7 28 Table 7 5 Analog Input Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections 7 28 Table 8 1 RS 232 DB Connector Pin Configurations cocccicicinicincn 8 12 Table 8 2 RS 485 DB Connector Pin Configurati0N o cnocinno 8 12 Table 9 1 Cable Opus 254s a cs a da al ad 9 14 Table 9 2 Color Codes for 25 Pin and 37 Pin Cables o o o 9 14 Table 9 3 Mounting Options curia t 9 15 Table B 1 C Link Protocol Commands ou ceccecceessestesteseeseeseseeseeteeteseeseesees B 2 Table B 2 Averaging TIMES 0 cccccceccccscecesesescetesesesteesesescetesesesceteseseeteesees B 10 Model 42 Instruction Manual xvii Tables xviii Model 42 Instruction Manual Table B 3 Alarm Trigger Values oooocooicicococnininincinnnonooconroncornrnnnonororonnosos B 17 Table B 4 Record Output FormatS ooocccicicicincinnnnincnnoncnnoncnncncnncnonocnrnncnnnnos B 22 Table B 5 Stream Time Values oc ccceccceccsecsessesteseeseeseesestesseseeseenseneseeseens B 25 Table B 6 Standard Ranges ococioonciciocinconincnnncono
151. e User Value screen allows the user to set the output value for the corresponding input voltage for the selected table point in the conversion table from 9999999 to 99999999 The default table is a two point table with point 1 0 00 V 000 0 U and point 2 10 00 V 10 0 U e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt Select Table Point gt User Value 3 54 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Temperature Compensation Pressure Compensation Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Temperature compensation provides compensation for any changes to the instrument s output signal due to internal instrument temperature variations The effects of internal instrument temperature changes on the analyzer s subsystems and output have been empirically determined This empirical data is used to compensate for any changes in temperature This compensation can be used for special applications or when operating the instrument outside the recommended temperature range even though the Model 427 does not require temperature compensation for EPA equivalency When temperature compensation is on the display shows the current internal instrument temperature measured by a thermistor on the Interface board When temperature compensation is off the display shows the factory standard temperature of 30 C e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt
152. e auto calibration routine to value where value is a floating point representation of the gas concentration in current selected units The gas units are the same as those chosen by the user The example below sets the NO span gas concentration to 123 4 ppb Send set no gas 123 4 Receive set no gas 123 4 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual B 27 C Link Protocol Commands Calibration B 28 Model 42 Instruction Manual no bkg nox bkg bkg no bkg nox These commands report the current NO and NO backgrounds The example below reports that the NO background is 5 5 ppb Send no bkg Receive no bkg 5 5 ppb set no bkg value set nox bkg value set bkg no value set bkg nox value These commands are used to set NO and NO backgrounds to user defined values to value where value is a floating point representation of the background in current selected units The example below sets the NO background to 5 5 ppb Send set no bkg 5 5 Receive set no bkg 5 5 ok pres cal This command reports the pressure recorded at the time of calibration The example below shows that the pressure at calibration is 85 5 mmHg Send pres cal Receive pres Cal 85 5 mmHg set pres cal This command automatically sets the current pressure as the calibration pressure The example below successfully sets the calibration pressure to 120 5 mmHg Send set pres cal 120 5 Receive set pres cal 120 5 ok set cal perm gas offset
153. e characters Each command must begin with the proper instrument identification number ASCII character The command in the example below begins with the ASCII character code 170 decimal which directs the command to the Mode l 425 and is terminated by a carriage return CR ASCII character code 13 decimal If an incorrect command is sent a bad command message will be received The example below sends the incorrect command set unit ppm instead of the correct command set gas unit ppm Send set unit ppm Receive set unit ppm bad cmd The save and set save params commands stores parameters in FLASH It is important that each time instrument parameters are changed that this command be sent If changes are not saved they will be lost in the event of a power failure Table B 1 lists the 427 C Link protocol commands The interface will respond to the command strings outlined below Table B 1 C Link Protocol Commands Command Description Page addr dns Reports sets domain name server address for Ethernet port B 39 addr gw Reports sets default gateway address for Ethernet port B 39 addr ip Reports sets IP address for Ethernet port B 39 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Command Description Page addr nm Reports sets netmask address for Ether
154. e mode For more information about the dual and auto range modes see Single Range Mode Dual Range Mode and Auto Range Mode earlier in this chapter Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 13 Operation Range Menu Table 3 5 lists the available operating ranges Table 3 6 lists the extended ranges When switching from standard to extended ranges the PMT voltage must be readjusted For more information about readjusting the PMT voltage see Chapter 7 Servicing e Inthe Main Menu choose Range gt NO NO2 or NOx Range CHS mTOR pH eb ad A Pi EE EE Table 3 5 Standard Ranges ppb ppm pgm mgm 50 0 05 100 0 1 100 0 10 200 0 2 200 0 20 500 0 5 500 0 50 1 000 1 0 1 000 1 00 2 000 2 0 2 000 2 00 5 000 5 0 5 000 5 00 10 000 10 0 10 000 10 00 20 000 20 0 20 000 20 00 30 000 30 0 C1 C1 C1 C1 C2 C2 C2 C2 c3 C3 c3 C3 3 14 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Set Custom Ranges Thermo Fisher Scientific Table 3 6 Extended Ranges Operation Range Menu ppb ppm pgm mgm 200 0 2 500 0 5 500 0 5 1 000 1 1 000 1 2 000 2 2 000 2 5 000 5 5 000 5 10 000 10 10 000 10 20 000 20 20 000 20 50 000 50 50 000 50 100 000 100 100 000 100 150 000 150 C1 C1 C1 C1 C2 C2 C2 C2 C3 C3 03 c3 C1 C2 and C3 are custom ranges For more information about custom ranges see Set Custom Ranges below The Set Custom Ranges
155. e outputs Each may be software configured for any one of the following ranges while maintaining a minimum resolution of 12 bits e 0 100mV e 0 1V e 0 5V e 0 10V The user can calibrate each analog output zero and span point through firmware At least 5 of full scale over and under range are also supported The analog outputs may be assigned to any measurement or diagnostic channel with a user defined range in the units of the selected parameter The voltage outputs are independent of the current outputs Model 42 Instruction Manual 8 9 System Description 1 0 Components Analog Current Outputs Optional Analog Voltage Inputs Optional Digital Relay Outputs Digital Inputs 8 10 Model 42 Instruction Manual The optional I O Expansion board includes six isolated current outputs These are software configured for any one of the following ranges while maintaining a minimum resolution of 11 bits e 0 20 mA e 4 20mA The user can calibrate each analog output zero and span point through firmware At least 5 of full scale over and under range are also supported The analog outputs may be assigned to any measurement or diagnostic channel with a user defined range in the units of the selected parameter The current outputs are independent of the voltage outputs The current outputs are isolated from the instrument power and ground but they share a common return line Isolated GND The optional I O expansion board in
156. e parameter list for parsing the fields from an ASCII ERec response Parameters are separated by spaces and the line is terminated by a n the normal line separator character Valid fields are s parse a string d parse a decimal number ld parse a long 32 bit decimal number f parse a floating point number x parse a hexadecimal number lx parse a long 32 bit hex number ignore the field Note Signed versus unsigned for the integer values does not matter it is handled automatically A The second line of the Layout response is the binary parameter list for parsing the fields from a binary response Parameters MUST be separated by spaces and the line is terminated by a n Valid fields are t parse a time specifier 2 bytes D parse a date specifier 3 bytes i ignore one 8 bit character 1 byte e parse a 24 bit floating point number 3 bytes n x E parse a 24 bit floating point number 3 bytes N x f parse a 32 bit floating point number 4 bytes c parse an 8 bit signed number 1 byte C parse an 8 bit unsigned number 1 byte n parse a 16 bit signed number 2 bytes N parse a 16 bit unsigned number 2 bytes m parse a 24 bit signed number 3 bytes M parse a 24 bit unsigned number 3 bytes l parse a 32 bit signed number 4 bytes L parse a 32 bit unsigned number 4 bytes There is an optional single digit d which may follow any of the numeric fields which indicates
157. e stamp to streaming data string 01 Disables time stamp to streaming data string set cal no bkg set cal nox bkg These commands will auto calibrate the NO and NO backgrounds If the instrument is set to manual NO mode the response to set cal no bkg will be can t wrong settings The example below shows a successful auto calibration of the NO background Send set cal no bkg Receive set cal no bkg ok Model 42 Instruction Manual B 25 C Link Protocol Commands Calibration B 26 Model 42 Instruction Manual set cal no coef set cal no2 coef set cal nox coef set cal high no coef set cal high no2 coef set cal high nox coef set cal low no coef set cal low no2 coef set cal low nox coef These commands will auto calibrate NO NO and NO coefficients based on NO NO and NO span gas concentrations The high and low commands are only available in dual and auto range mode If the mode is incorrect the instrument responds with can t wrong settings The example below shows a successful auto calibration of the low NO coefficient Send set cal low no coef Receive set cal low no coef ok no coef no2 coef nox coef high no coef high no2 coef high nox coef low no coef low no2 coef low nox coef These commands report NO NO and NO coefficients in single range mode or the high and low range coefficients in dual or auto range mode If the mode is incorrect the instrument responds with
158. eaction Chamber o ocoocinocnininninicninicnicooo 7 12 Figure 7 7 Replacing the PMT ococococicicccccccncnccccnnnnocoocornnnonocoronnonorornnnononoss 7 14 Figure 7 8 Replacing the PMT HVPS o ae 7 15 Figure 7 9 Cleaning or Removing the Reaction Chamber 7 18 Figure 7 10 NO to NO Molybdenum Converter Assembly 7 19 Figure 7 11 Replacing the Solenoid Valve oooniicinciionincncincnninncnnnooso 7 21 Figure 7 12 Replacing the Ozonator Assembly o oocooonoincnoincnnincnninicninnooso 1 22 Figure 7 13 Replacing the Input BOAard ocoococoociciiccnnioncnnnncnononocnrnnnononoso 7 24 Model 42 Instruction Manual xv Figures xvi Model 42 Instruction Manual Figure 7 14 Replacing the DC Power Supply o oconccincnininnnooninooos 7 26 Figure 7 15 Rear Panel Analog Input and Output Pins 7 27 Figure 7 16 Replacing the Pressure Transducer 7 32 Figure 7 17 Replacing the Scrubber ccc ccccc cc ceccscesescesestesesteseeteseseeseevens 7 37 Figure 7 18 Replacing the I O Expansion Board Optional 7 38 Figure 7 19 Rear Panel Board Connectors o oocococicccncocininccnnocononccnroncnnccnnoos 7 38 Figure 7 20 Replacing the Measurement Interface Board 7 41 Figure 7 21 Replacing the Flow Transducer ocococociciconocnnncncnncncncnncnrnnnnnoooso 7
159. eaming Data Configuration island 3 37 Streaming Data Interval a scccva dasgrchecdi se saedancr shee haa eacar cided cade datens 3 38 Choose Item Sia coin 3 39 CONCENTEATIONS 26565 csi EE AAA it 3 39 Other Measurement dd 3 39 Analog Inputs 2 liada 3 40 RS 232 RS 485 Selecionar 3 40 TCP VTP Srs ie 3 41 Use DACP a cin 3 41 PAS no N 3 42 Nemo 3 42 Default Gateway ia 3 43 PAs CIN O E t eecbastiteia 3 43 Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents EU O 3 43 Output Relay Settings isc it 3 44 Logic teni lisa 3 44 Instrument SE 3 44 AS as 3 45 Nord ii Aisha a sate GaS 3 46 Digital np t Settings sate Aenean ts oot a ete ele 3 46 A O 3 46 Instrument Acorde 3 47 Analog Output ConfiguratiON ooonononnnnnnnnnncnnnnnononnnnnnronncncnnnnnnss 3 47 Select O tp t Rare ste ciate A ade ella Oa naar Ekas 3 48 Minimum and Maximum Male ai tienes seeks 3 48 Choose Signal to Outputs cote Biss ees leet aes ta 3 50 Analog Input Configuration iaa 3 51 Descriptor gosu or A A a 3 52 Units A n a a 3 52 Decimal Fla Cetin a it ae 3 53 N mberof Table Pits cosescstensdusrcicedssvtesantecgrcacdseaasaieteacsdessees 3 53 Table A o le ean ea Akai 3 53 O a Dab ea ie oaget eE 3 54 User Value cri 3 54 Temperature omipensati ons is aicosiveccssadion aan taeavsuetesonsnsivsamasventos 3 55 Pressure Compensation tdo ie 3 55 Sereen Conti ads 3 56 Service Mode clio diia ains 3 56 Did ie 3 57 Diagnostics Mentir data rot ee aire ER Nan 3 57 Program VelSid iii 3 58
160. eation gas temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Perm Gas Temp gt Min or Max 3 68 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Pressure Min and Max Pressure Thermo Fisher Scientific Limits Flow Operation Alarms Menu The Pressure screen displays the current reaction chamber pressure reading and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 150 to 300 mmHg If the pressure reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated The word ALARM appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure The Minimum Pressure alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum pressure screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure gt Min or Max The Flow screen displays the current sample flow reading and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to 1 LPM If the sample flow reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated The word ALARM appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu e In the Main Menu choose Alarms gt Flow Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 69 Operation Alarms Menu Min and Max Flow Limits The Minimum Flow alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum sample flow alarm limit The
161. ed in the Code of Federal Regulations Title 40 Part 53 Designated Reference Method Number RFNA 1289 074 EPA Designation Date December 11 1989 amended for Model 422 The Model 427 Chemiluminescence NO NO2 NO Analyzer meets EPA reference designation requirements when operated with the following Range 50 to 1000 ppb Averaging Time 10 to 300 seconds Temperature Range 15 to 35 C Line Voltage 90 to 110 Vac 50 60 Hertz 105 to 125 Vac 50 60 Hertz 210 to 250 Vac 50 60 Hertz Pressure Compensation ON or OFF Temperature Compensation ON or OFF Flow Rate 0 5 to 1 LPM RS 232 RS 485 Interface With or without the following options Teflon Particulate Filter Ozone Particulate Filter Internal Zero Span and Sample Valves Ozone Permeation Dryer Permeation Oven Rack Mounts 1 0 Expansion Board Reference Method Designation Thermo Fisher Scientific About This Manual This manual provides information about operating maintaining and servicing the analyzer It also contains important alerts to ensure safe operation and prevent equipment damage The manual is organized into the following chapters and appendixes to provide direct access to specific operation and service information Chapter 1 Introduction provides an overview of product features describes the principles of operation and lists the specifications Chapter 2 Installation describes how to unpack setu
162. elay 4 Contact b 24 Relay 5 Contact b 25 Relay 6 Contact b 26 Relay 7 Contact b 27 Relay 8 Contact b 28 Relay 9 Contact b 29 Relay 10 Contact b 30 24V 31 24V 32 24V 33 24V Model 42 Instruction Manual 6 19 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label Reference Designator Pin 34 35 36 37 Signal Description 24V 24V 24V 24V Table 6 8 Input Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label PMT IN Reference Designator J1 Pin N Signal Description PMT Input Ground INTF BD J2 o ao N oon A wo N gt an o 15V Ground 15V 5V Ground Measurement Frequency Output Amplifier Zero Adjust Voltage SPI Input SPI Clock SPI Board Select Table 6 9 Temperature Control Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator INTERFACE J1 1 Bench Temperature Input 2 Ground 3 15V 4 Converter Heater On Off 5 Converter Temperature Input 6 15V_PWR AC INPUT J2 1 AC HOT 2 AC NEUT BENCH J3 1 Bench Heater AC Output 6 20 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Service Locations Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 2 Bench Heater AC Return 3 Ground 4 Bench Thermistor CONVERTER J4 1 Ground 2 Converter Heater AC Output 3 Converter Heater AC Return CONV TC J5 1 Converter Thermocouple TC 2 Converter Thermoc
163. ent on page 7 41 Flow Transducer Calibration on page 7 42 Front Panel Board Replacement on page 7 44 LCD Module Replacement on page 7 45 Service Locations on page 7 46 Read the safety precautions before beginning any procedures in this chapter WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives 4 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Safety Precautions If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A CAUTION Carefully observe the instructions in each procedure Avoid contact with converter heated components A Allow converter to cool to room temperature before handling converter components A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch a grounded metal object before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A Handle all printed circuit boards by the edges A Do not point the photomultiplier tube at a light source This can permanently damage the tube A Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module A The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile
164. ent Parts Part Number Description 100480 00 Front Panel Pushbutton Board 101491 01 Processor Board 100533 00 Motherboard 100539 00 Digital Output Board 100542 00 1 0 Expansion Board Optional Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Replacement Parts List Part Number Description 102340 00 Front Panel Connector Board 102496 00 Front Panel Display 101399 00 Transformer 220 240VAC Optional 101863 00 Transformer 100VAC Optional 100536 00 Measurement Interface Board 100856 00 Temperature Control Board Molybdenum Converter 100856 01 Temperature Control Board Stainless Steel Converter 101167 00 Input Board Assembly 9973 Ozonator Assembly 101419 00 Ozonator Transformer 101023 00 Pressure Transducer 101021 00 Flow Transducer Sample 101620 00 Flow Switch Ozone 9367 Photomultiplier Tube PMT 101024 00 PMT High Voltage Power Supply 101324 00 PMT Base Socket Assembly 101390 00 Solenoid Valve 101020 00 Cooler Assembly 02648 01 Reaction Chamber Assembly 101009 00 NO to NO Converter Assembly Molybdenum 110VAC 101214 00 NO to NO Converter Assembly Stainless Steel 110VAC 9269 Molybdenum Converter Cartridge 101011 00 Pump 100VAC w Plate and Fittings 9267 Pump Repair Kit for 101011 00 101055 00 AC Receptacle Assembly 101681 00 Power Supply Assembly 24VDC w Base Plate and Screws 100907 00 Fan
165. eports sets current NO range B 31 react temp Reports current reaction chamber temperature B 12 relay stat Reports sets relay logic status to for the designated relay s B 46 ri right Simulates pressing right pushbutton B 29 ru run Simulates pressing run pushbutton B 29 sample Sets zero span valves to sample mode B 33 sample flow Reports current measured sample flow in LPM B 11 sample gas Sets zero span valves to sample gas mode B 33 save Stores parameters in FLASH B 38 save params Stores parameters in FLASH B 38 sc screen C series legacy command that reports a generic response B 31 Use iscreen instead sp field Reports sets item number and name in scratch pad list B 24 span Sets zero span valves to span mode B 34 span gas Sets zero span valves to span gas mode B 34 sr Reports last short record stored B 19 Thermo Fisher Scientific Measurements Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Measurements Command Description Page srec Reports maximum number of short records B 20 srec format Reports sets output format for short records ASCII or binary B 21 srec layout Reports current layout of short record data B 22 srec mem size Reports maximum number of short records B 22 srec per Reports sets short record logging period B 22 stream per Reports sets current set time interval for streaming data B 25 stream time Reports sets a time stamp to streaming data or not B 25 temp comp Reports sets temp
166. er In no event shall Seller have any obligation to make repairs replacements or corrections required in whole or in part as the result of i normal wear and tear ii accident disaster or event of force majeure iii misuse fault or negligence of or by Buyer iv use of the Products in a manner for which Model 427 Instruction Manual A 1 Warranty Warranty they were not designed v causes external to the Products such as but not limited to power failure or electrical power surges vi improper storage and handling of the Products or vii use of the Products in combination with equipment or software not supplied by Seller If Seller determines that Products for which Buyer has requested warranty services are not covered by the warranty hereunder Buyer shall pay or reimburse Seller for all costs of investigating and responding to such request at Seller s then prevailing time and materials rates If Seller provides repair services or replacement parts that are not covered by the warranty provided in this warranty Buyer shall pay Seller therefor at Seller s then prevailing time and materials rates ANY INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE REPAIR SERVICE RELOCATION OR ALTERATION TO OR OF OR OTHER TAMPERING WITH THE PRODUCTS PERFORMED BY ANY PERSON OR ENTITY OTHER THAN SELLER WITHOUT SELLER S PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL OR ANY USE OF REPLACEMENT PARTS NOT SUPPLIED BY SELLER SHALL IMMEDIATELY VOID AND CANCEL ALL WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE
167. erature compensation on or off B 35 time Reports sets current time 24 hour time B 38 up Simulates pressing up pushbutton B 29 zero Sets zero span valves to zero mode B 34 zero gas Sets zero span valves to zero gas mode B 34 avg time high avg time low avg time These commands report the averaging time in seconds when operating in single range or averaging time used with the high and low ranges when operating in dual or auto range mode The example below shows that the averaging time is 300 seconds according to Table B 2 Send avg time Receive avg time 11 300 sec set avg time selection set high avg time selection set low avg time selection These commands set the averaging time high and low averaging times according to Table B 2 The example below sets the low range averaging time to 120 seconds Send set low avg time 8 Receive set low avg time 8 ok Model 42 Instruction Manual B 9 C Link Protocol Commands Measurements Table B 2 Averaging Times Selection Time NO Measure Mode Time NO NO Measure NO Measure Mode Mode 0 1 seconds 1 2 2 5 3 10 10 seconds 4 20 20 5 30 30 6 60 60 7 90 90 8 120 120 9 180 180 10 240 240 11 300 300 no no2 nox high no high no2 high nox low no low no2 low nox These commands report the measured NO NO and NO concentrations when operating in single range or high and low NO NO and NO when operating in dual or auto range mode T
168. erse 8 Calibrate the analog voltage outputs as defined earlier in this chapter all ranges Measurement Use the following procedure to replace the measurement interface board Fi 20 Interface Board 7 Replacement pment Required Measurement interface board Philips screwdriver f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Lower the partition panel then proceed to the next step below Refer to Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel on page 7 8 in this chapter 2 Unplug all connectors Note the locations of the connectors to facilitate reconnection 7 40 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Flow Transducer Replacement 3 Unscrew the two screws at the top of the measurement interface board Pop off the measurement interface board from the two bottom mounting studs and remove the board Figure 7 20 4 To install the measurement interface board follow previous steps in reverse 5 Re install the measurement bench 6 Calibrate the PMT voltage pressure transducer flow transducer input board and ambient temperature sensor as defined earlier in this chapter Mounting Studs 2 Mounting Screws 2 Measurement Interface Board Figure 7 20 Replacing the Measurement Interface Board
169. ess gt to return to the Run screen 7 Repeat Steps 3 through 6 selecting Cal NOx Background to set the NO backgrounds to zero Use the following procedure to calibrate NO channel to the NO calibration gas 1 Disconnect the source of zero air from the SAMPLE bulkhead In its place connect a source of NO calibration gas of about 80 of the low NO full scale range 2 Allow the analyzer to sample the low NO calibration gas until the NO NO and NO readings stabilize 3 When the responses are stabile from the Main Menu choose Calibration gt Cal Lo NO Coefficient 4 The Lo NO field displays the current NO concentration The Lo NO Span Conc field is where you enter the low NO calibration gas concentration Use e J to move the cursor left and right and use to increment and decrement the numeric character at the cursor Model 42i Instruction Manual 4 17 Calibration Calibration in Dual Range and Auto Range Mode Calibrate Low NO Calibrate Low NO 4 18 Model 42 Instruction Manual 5 Press to calculate and save the new low NO coefficient based on the entered span concentration Use the following procedure to calibrate the NO channel to the NO calibration gas Press Ca to return to the Calibration menu and choose Cal Lo NOx Coefficient Verify that the low NO calibration gas concentration is the same as the low NO calibration gas concentration plus any known NO impurity The
170. f the warning is ignored A Thermo Fisher Scientific About This Manual Safety and Equipment Damage Alerts Safety and Equipment damage Alerts in this Manual Alert Description WARNING If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired 4 The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service personnel only A The Model 427 is supplied with a three wire grounding cord Under no circumstances should this grounding system be defeated A CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks do not to let the liquid crystal A N contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Equipment Damage Do not attempt to lift the analyzer by the cover or other external fittings A Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A Handle all printed circuit boards by the edges only A Do not remove the panel or frame from the LCD module A The LCD module polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully A Do not wipe the LCD module polarizing plate with a dry cloth it may easily scratch the plate A Do not use Ketonics solvent or aromatic solvent to clean the LC
171. f this chapter Specifications for Pp Dynamic parameter specification to ensure complete reaction of the Gas Titrator available 03 ppm min NOlrc NO concentration in the reaction chamber ppm tk residence time of the reactant gases in the reaction chamber min NO sto Concentration of the undiluted NO standard ppm Fro NO flow rate sccm Fo Ds generator air flow rate sccm Vre Volume of the reaction chamber cc Fr Analyzer demand plus 10 to 50 excess The Os generator ozonator airflow rate and the NO flow rate must be adjusted such that the following relationships hold Pr NO Irc X tr 2 2 75 ppm min Eno NO Irc INO Ir Fot Fro NRO ai tr Fo Fno Determining GPT System Use the following procedure to determine the flow conditions to be used in Flow Conditions the GPT system 1 Determine FT the total flow required at the output manifold which should be equal to the analyzer demand plus 10 to 50 percent excess 4 6 Model 427 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Equipment Required Establish NO our as the highest NO concentration that will be required at the output manifold NO our should be about equal to 90 of the upper range limit URL of the NO concentration range to be covered Determine Eno as ae NO our X Fr NO e NO stp Select a convenient or available reaction chamber volume Initially a trial volume may be selected i
172. ference Designator IPJ8 Pin 0 N Signal Description Ground RS485 from Motherboard RS485 from Motherboard PRES MJ3 gt WO N Pressure Sensor Input Ground 15V 15V INPUT BD MJ8 Oo co N O o A UO N gt o 15V Ground 15V 5V Ground Measurement Frequency Output Amplifier Zero Adjust Voltage SPI Output SPI Clock SPI Board Select AMB TEMP HVPS Thermo Fisher Scientific MJ9 MJ10 Slim oOo oO A WO N Ambient Temperature Thermistor Ground HV Power Supply Voltage Adjust Ground HV Power Supply On Off Ground HV Power Supply Voltage Monitor Ground Model 42 Instruction Manual 6 13 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 14 Model 42 Instruction Manual Connector Label Reference Designator Pin Signal Description Ground FLOW SW MJ14 w N NC Ground Ozonator Flow OK Switch FLOW MJ15 on A WO N Flow Sensor Input Ground 15V 15V Ground TEMP CTRL MJ17 D oO A O N Bench Temperature Input Ground 15V Converter Heater On Off Converter Temperature Input 15V_PWR OZONATOR 0J1 Ozonator Output A Ozonator Output B 24V IN AC PUMP FAN 1 PJ1 PJ4 24V Ground AC HOT AC NEUT AC Ground 24V Ground FAN 2 PJ5 24V Ground AC IN PJ6 AC HOT AC NEUT AC Ground COOLER PJ7 FP WO N Cooler
173. g Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 16 Current Output Return 17 Current Output 2 18 Current Output Return 19 Current Output 3 20 Current Output Return 21 Current Output 4 22 Current Output Return 23 Current Output 5 24 Current Output Return 25 Current Output 6 MOTHER BD J2 1 5V 2 24V 3 24V 4 Ground 5 Ground 6 Ground 7 RS485 to Motherboard 8 RS485 to Motherboard Table 6 7 Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Label Designator MOTHER BD J1 Pin o co N oon A O N 3 o Signal Description 5V 24V 24V Ground Ground Ground SPI Reset SPI Input SPI Output SPI Board Select SPI Clock 6 18 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator DIGITAL J2 1 Relay 1 Contact a OUTPUTS 2 Relay 2 Contact a 3 Relay 3 Contact a 4 Relay 4 Contact a 5 Relay 5 Contact a 6 Relay 6 Contact a 7 Relay 7 Contact a 8 Relay 8 Contact a 9 Relay 9 Contact a 10 Relay 10 Contact a 11 NC 12 Solenoid Drive Output 1 13 Solenoid Drive Output 2 14 Solenoid Drive Output 3 15 Solenoid Drive Output 4 16 Solenoid Drive Output 5 17 Solenoid Drive Output 6 18 Solenoid Drive Output 7 19 Solenoid Drive Output 8 20 Relay 1 Contact b 21 Relay 2 Contact b 22 Relay 3 Contact b 23 R
174. g period is 5 minutes Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging Send srec per Receive srec per 5 min set lrec per value set srec per value value 1 5 15 30 60 These commands set the long and short records logging period to value in minutes The example below sets the long record logging period to 15 minutes Send set lrec per 15 Receive set lrec per 15 ok no of lrec no of srec These commands report the number of long and short records stored in the long and short records memory The example below shows that 50 long records have been stored in the memory Send no of lrec Receive no of lrec 50 recs malloc lrec malloc srec These commands report the currently set memory allocation for long and short records in percent of total memory Send malloc lrec Receive malloc lrec 10 set malloc lrec value set malloc srec value value 0 to 100 These commands set the percent of memory space allocated for long and short records to value where value is a floating point number representing percent The example below sets the memory allocation for long records to 10 Note Issuing these commands will clear all the logging data memory All the existing records should be retrieved using appropriate commands if required A Send set malloc lrec 10 Receive set malloc lrec 10 ok Model 42 Instruction Manual B 23 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging B 24 Model
175. gas On 0 10 0 10 0 1 0 10 Span gas On 0 10 0 10 1 0 0 10 Gas Unit Indication ppm OR ppb 10 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Ozonator Off 0 0 1 10 0 0 0 0 PMT Off 0 J1 0 J0 0 10 0 0 Not used 1 10 0 0 0 0 0 10 Table D 2 Error Status for Model 42i D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO gt Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 PL gt Hex value 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 MSB LSB Error status Not Used 0 0 0 0 0 0 00103 Not Used 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Not Used 0 0 0 0 0 J1 0 10 Any Temperature Alarm 0 10 0 10 1 0 0 0 Pressure Alarm 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Sample Flow Alarm o 10 1 0 o 10 0 10 Ozonator Flow Alarm 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Not used 1 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual D 7
176. ged into the measurement interface board to a calibrated thermometer Figure 7 2 Note Since the thermistors are interchangeable to an accuracy of 0 2 C and have a value of 10K ohms at 25 C an alternate procedure is to connect an accurately known 10K resistor to the thermistor input AMB TEMP on the measurement interface board and enter the temperature reading A A 1 C change corresponds to a 5 change in resistance thus this alternative procedure can be quite accurate as a check however it clearly is not NIST traceable A 3 From the Main Menu press to scroll to Service gt press gt to scroll to Temperature Calibration gt and press Ce The Calibrate Ambient Temperature screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A Model 42 Instruction Manual 7 35 Servicing Fuse Replacement 4 Wait at least 10 seconds for the ambient reading to stabilize use e Jand to enter the known temperature and press to save the temperature value 5 Install the cover Fuse Replacement Use the following procedure to replace the fuse Equipment Required Replacement fuses 250VAC 4 Amp SlowBlow for 100 VAC and 110VAC models 250VAC 2 Amp SlowBlow for 220 240VAC models 1 Turn instrument OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Remove fuse drawer located on the AC power connector 3 If eithe
177. gging on page B 17 e Calibration on page B 25 e Keys Display on page B 29 e Measurement Configuration on page B 31 e Hardware Configuration on page B 35 e Communications Configuration on page B 39 e I O Configuration on page B 42 e Record Layout Definition on page B 47 Each command sent to the analyzer over the serial port must begin with the American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII symbol or byte value equivalent of the instrument s identification number plus 128 For example if the instrument ID is set to 25 then each command must begin with the ACSI character code 153 decimal The analyzer ignores any command that does not begin with its instrument identification number If Model 427 Instruction Manual B 1 C Link Protocol Commands Commands Commands Commands List B 2 Model 42 Instruction Manual the instrument ID is set to 0 then this byte is not required For more information on changing Instrument ID see Chapter 3 Operation The analyzer must be in the remote mode in order to change instrument parameters via remote However the command set mode remote can be sent to the analyzer to put it in the remote mode Report commands commands that don t begin with set can be issued either in the remote or local mode For information on changing modes see Chapter 3 Operation The commands can be sent in either uppercase or lowercas
178. ging time If this averaging time is greater than ten seconds the measurement is reported every 10 seconds The one second average of the other analog inputs are reported directly no additional signal conditioning is performed by the high level processor In auto mode every ten seconds the NO NO solenoid switches and the processor waits three seconds for the reaction chamber to flush and Thermo Fisher Scientific Measurement Calculations Output Communication Thermo Fisher Scientific System Description Software stabilize After those three seconds it accumulates the signal counts for seven seconds before again switching the solenoid The calculation of the NO and NO concentrations is lengthy and uses the high level processor to provide the most accurate readings The calculation egins by subtracting the appropriate electronic offset from the seven second count accumulation Following this correction the raw accumulated counts are scaled according to the gain setting of the input board Next the uncorrected NO and NO values are determined according to a unique averaging algorithm which minimizes errors resulting from rapidly changing gas concentrations This algorithm results in NO and NO values which are stored in RAM in a circular buffer that holds all the ten second data from the previous five minutes This data is averaged over the selected time interval which can be any multiple of ten between 10 and 300 the manu
179. he Factory Cal Oven Therm menu from the Perm Oven Settings menu in the Service menu Select Low Point enter the exact value of the resistor and press to calibrate the low resistance point Press Cm to return to the Factory Cal Oven Therm menu Connect a resistance of approximately 5 KQ across pins 3 and 4 of POJ3 Go to the High Point screen enter the exact value of the resistor and press to calibrate the high resistance point Press Cm to return to the Factory Cal Oven Therm menu Model 42 Instruction Manual 9 5 Optional Equipment Internal Permeation Span Source Permeation Tube Oven Calibration Setting Perm Oven Temperature 9 6 Model 427 Instruction Manual 17 Remove resistor from POJ3 and re attach the permeation oven 18 Perform a thermistor calibration using the Permeation Tube Oven Calibration procedure that follows There are two general approaches that can be used to calibrate the permeation tube oven The first is to calibrate the temperature indicator very accurately to better than 0 02 C and to use a permeation tube whose weight loss has been previously determined at that temperature Note An error of approximately 0 1 C corresponds to an error of 1 in release rate A The second approach is to note that the thermistors used to measure temperature are interchangeable to better than 0 2 C Thus a 1 resistor of the proper value 4 369 KQ for 45 C can be used to set the span on the
180. he Zero Auto Calibration screen read only allows the user to view the Calibration status of the most recent auto background calibration The zero and span auto calibration screens are visible only if the auto calibration option is enabled and function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Zero or Span Autocal Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 71 Operation Alarms Menu ip priori PLP NO NO and NOx The NO Concentration screen displays the current NO concentration and Concentration sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to 100 000 ppb 0 to 100 ppm and 0 to 150 000 pg m 0 to 150 mg m The minimum alarm may be programmed as a floor trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration falls below the minimum value or a ceiling trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration goes above the minimum value If the NO concentration goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated The word ALARM appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu The NO and NO concentration screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt NO NO2 or NOx Concentration Cs a i E Pi EE i PME TY Saad Min and Max NO NO2 and NO The Minimum NO Concentration alarm limit screen is used to change the Concentration Limits minimum NO concentration alarm limits The minimum and maximum NO NO and NO concentra
181. he example below shows that the NO concentration is 67 2 ppb Send no Receive no 6720E 2 ppb conv temp This command reports the current NO converter temperature The example below reports that the current converter temperature is 320 7 C Send conv temp Receive conv temp 320 7 deg C B 10 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Measurements cooler temp This command reports the current PMT cooler temperature The example below reports that the current PMT cooler temperature is 2 8 C Send pmt temp Receive pmt temp 2 8 deg C flow sample flow These commands report the current measured flow The example below reports that the flow measurement is 0 700 liters minute Send flow Receive flow 0 7 1 m internal temp This command reports the current internal instrument temperature The first reading is the temperature being used in instrument calculations The second temperature is the actual temperature being measured If temperature compensation is on then both temperature readings are the same If temperature compensation is off a temperature of 30 C is used as the default temperature even though the actual internal temperature is 27 2 C The example below shows that temperature compensation is on and that the internal temperature is 27 2 C Send internal temp Receive internal temp 027 2 deg C actual 027 2 perm gas temp This command
182. he following is a list of abbreviations used in this document lt CR gt is abbreviation for Carriage Return ASCII code 0x0D lt STX gt is abbreviation for Start of Text ASCII code 0x02 lt ETX gt is abbreviation for End of Text ASCII code 0x03 lt SP gt is abbreviation for space ASCII code 0x20 The following is the basic structure of a Geysitech command lt STX gt Command text lt ETX gt lt BCC gt OR lt STX gt Command text lt CR gt Each Command is framed by control characters lt STX gt at the start and terminated with either lt ETX gt or lt CR gt If a command is terminated with lt ETX gt then additional two characters lt BCC gt is attached after lt ETX gt this is the block checksum Thermo Fisher Scientific Block Checksum lt BCC gt Geysitech Commands Instrument Control Command Thermo Fisher Scientific ST Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol Block Checksum lt BCC gt The block checksum is calculated beginning with a seed value of 00000000 binary 0x00 and bitwise exclusive ORing with each of the characters of the command string or response including the framing characters lt STX gt and lt ETX gt The checksum works as an error check The command terminator determines the presence or absence of lt BCC gt If a command is terminated by lt ETX gt then the next two characters are the checksum if the command is terminated with lt CR gt no checksum is attached The block c
183. he new low NO coefficient based on the entered span concentration Use the following procedure to calibrate the NO channel to the NO calibration gas Connect a source of high NO calibration gas of about 80 of the high NO full scale range Allow the analyzer to sample the high NO calibration gas until the NO NO and NO readings have stabilized After the responses have stabilized from the Main Menu choose Calibration gt Cal Hi NO Coefficient The Hi NO field displays the current NO concentration The Hi NO Span Conc field is where you enter the high NO calibration gas concentration Use Ce to move the cursor left and right and use Cr to increment and decrement the numeric character at the cursor Press to calculate and save the new high NO coefficient based on the entered span concentration Use the following procedure to calibrate the NO channel to the NO calibration gas l Ze Press Ca to return to the Calibration menu and choose Cal Hi NOx Coefficient Verify that the high NO calibration gas concentration is the same as the high NO calibration gas concentration plus any known NO impurity Use e J to move the cursor left and right and use Cr ys to increment and decrement the numeric character at the cursor Press to calculate and save the new high NO coefficient based on the entered span concentration Model 42 Instruction Manual 4 19 Calibration Calibration in Dual R
184. he output format for long and short records and dynamic data according to Table B 4 The example below sets the long record output format to ASCII with text Send set lrec format 1 Receive set lrec format 1 ok Table B 4 Record Output Formats Format Output Format 0 ASCII no text 1 ASCII with text 2 Binary data erec layout lrec layout srec layout These commands report the layout string indicating the data formats for data that is sent out in response to the erec lrec srec and related commands For details on how to interpret the strings see Record Layout Definition later in this appendix Send lrec layout Receive lrec layout s s lx f f f f f f f f f f f f t D L fFFFFFFFFFFF flags no nox hino hinox pres pmtt intt rctt convt smplf ozonf pmtv lrec mem size srec mem size These commands report the long and short records that can be stored with the current settings and the number of blocks reserved for long and short records To calculate the number of short records per block add 2 to the number of records and then divide by the number of blocks The example below shows that 7 blocks were reserved for long records and the maximum number of long records that can be stored in memory is 1426 Send lrec mem size Receive lrec mem size 1426 recs 7 blocks lrec per srec per These commands report the long and short records logging period The example below shows that the short record loggin
185. he service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt PMT Voltage Adjustment DH vided MAPA The Range Mode Select screen is used to switch between the various range modes single dual and auto range The range mode select screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Range Mode Select Thermo Fisher Scientific Converter Set Temperature Pressure Calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu The Converter Set Temperature screen is used to change the converter set temperature The converter set temperature reading is updated every second The converter set temperature screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Converter Set Temperature PR Ea mh drs MATTE ma Mi mpini rib Pit The Pressure Calibration submenu is used to calibrate the pressure sensor to zero span or restore factory default values The pressure calibration is visible only when the instrument is in service mode
186. he thermoelectric cooler fins Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing chapter A 1 Turn the instrument off and unplug the power cord 2 Remove the instrument cover 3 Locate the PMT cooler Figure 7 2 and Figure 7 6 4 Blow off the cooler fins using clean pressurized air It may be more convenient to vacuum the cooler fins In either case make sure that any particulate accumulation between the fins has been removed 5 If necessary use a small brush to remove residual particulate accumulation 6 Replace the cover 7 Connect the power cord and turn the instrument ON Use the following procedure to inspect and clean the fan filters 1 Remove the two fan guards from the fans and remove the filters 2 Flush the filters with warm water and let dry a clean oil free purge will help the drying process or blow the filters clean with compressed air 3 Re install the filters and fan guards Thermo Fisher Scientific Pump Rebuilding Thermo Fisher Scientific A Preventive Maintenance Pump Rebuilding Mounting Screws 4 Filter Fan Guard Figure 5 2 Inspecting and Cleaning the Fan Filters Use the following procedure to rebuild the pump Figure 5 3 To replace the pump see
187. hecksum is represented by two characters which represent a 2 digit hex number 1byte e g 1 byte 0xAB hex checksum will be represented by the two characters A amp B The checksum is referred to as lt BCC gt throughout this document The following commands are supported by the Geysitech protocol e Instrument Control Command ST e Data Sampling Data Query Command DA There are three control commands supported by the Geysitech protocol This lt control commands is a single letter which triggers an action in the instrument These commands are active only when service mode is inactive and the zero span option is present Command N switches the instrument gas mode to Zero mode Command K switches the instrument gas mode to Span mode Command M switches the instrument gas mode to Sample mode The following are the different acceptable formats of the ST command lt STX gt ST lt address gt lt control command gt lt ETX gt lt BCC gt OR lt STX gt ST lt address gt lt control command gt lt CR gt OR lt STX gt ST lt address gt lt SP gt lt control command gt lt CR gt OR lt STX gt ST lt address gt lt SP gt lt control command gt lt ETX gt lt BCC gt Model 42 Instruction Manual D 3 Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol Geysitech Commands The lt address gt is optional which means it can be left out completely The lt address gt if present must match the Instrument Address Additional
188. ibration If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Remove the cover 2 Disconnect the pump cable from AC PUMP connector on the measurement interface board 3 From the Main Menu press _4_ to scroll to Service gt press gt to scroll to Flow Calibration gt and press The Flow Sensor Cal menu appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 4 At the Flow Sensor Cal menu press to select Zero The Calibrate Flow Zero screen appears 5 Wait at least 10 seconds for the zero reading to stabilize then press to save the zero flow value 6 Reconnect the pump cable to the AC PUMP connector on the measurement interface board 7 Connect a calibrated flow sensor at the SAMPLE bulkhead on the rear panel 8 Press to return to the Flow Sensor Cal menu 9 At the Flow Sensor Cal menu press 2 to select Span The Calibrate Flow Span screen appears Model 42 Instruction Manual 7 43 Servicing Front Panel Board Replacement 7 44 Front Panel Board Replacement A Model 42 Instruction Manual 10 Wait at
189. ic conditions calibration factors and other pertinent data Use the following procedure to perform a zero and span check 1 Connect the zero gas to the SAMPLE bulkhead in a standard instrument or to the ZERO bulkhead in a Model 427 equipped with the zero span and sample solenoid valve option 2 Allow the instrument to sample zero gas until a stable reading is obtained on the NO NO and NO channels then record the zero readings Unless the zero has changed by more than 0 010 ppm it is recommended that the zero not be adjusted If an adjustment larger than this is indicated due to a change in zero reading a new multipoint calibration curve should be generated 3 Attach a supply of known concentration of NO and NO usually generated via an NIST traceable NO working standard and a GPT system to the SAMPLE bulkhead or SPAN bulkhead for instruments equipped with the zero span and sample solenoid valve option on the rear panel 4 Allow the instrument to sample the calibration gas until a stable reading is obtained on the NO NO and NO channels If the Model 42 Instruction Manual 4 21 Calibration Zero and Span Check calibration has changed by more than 10 a new multipoint calibration curve should be generated 5 When the calibration check has been completed record the NO NO and NO values 6 Reconnect the analyzer sample line to the SAMPLE bulkhead 4 22 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scien
190. ics gt Program Version E OPUER EEE EE The Voltages menu displays the current diagnostic voltage readings This screen enables the power supply to be quickly read for low or fluctuating voltages without having to use a voltage meter The I O board is only displayed if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages E Pido The Motherboard screen read only is used to display the current voltage readings on the motherboard e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt Motherboard Voltages Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu Lal nobel Interface Board Voltages The Interface Board screen read only is used to display the current voltage readings on the interface board e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt Interface Board Voltages IKIRE i 3 MPT WH mpini PPP LES Piel Leb Pal 1 0 Board Voltages The I O Board screen read only is used to display the current voltage readings on the I O expansion board This menu is only displayed if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt I O Board Voltages Ea Cd PTE CH bo bet ee mid Temperatures The Temperatures screen read only displays the internal temperature reaction chamber temperature cooler temperature converter temperatures and perm oven temperatures if the permeati
191. ilter Alarm Ozonator Flow Ozone flow low Check ozone capillary 0 008 inch 1D for blockage Replace as necessary Alarm Zero Check Alarm Span Check Alarm Zero Autocal Alarm Span Autocal Instrument out of calibration Recalibrate instrument Check gas supply Perform manual calibration Alarm NO NO NO Conc Concentration has exceeded range limit Concentration low Check to insure range corresponds with expected value If not select proper range Check user defined low set point set to zero Alarm Motherboard Status Alarm Interface Status Alarm 1 0 Exp Status Internal cables not connected properly Board is defective Check that all internal cables are connected properly Recycle AC power to instrument If still alarming change board Model 42 Instruction Manual 6 5 Troubleshooting Board Level Connection Diagrams Board Level Figure 6 1 and Figure 6 2 are board level connection diagrams for the common electronics and measurement system These illustrations can be Connection used along with the connector pin descriptions in Table 6 3 through Table D lagrams 6 9 to troubleshoot board level faults VOEXPANSICN EXPANSION I O TOMEASUREMENT SYSTEM DIGITAL outputs 37 Pin RS232 RS485 LCD DISPLAY RS232 RS485 10 BASE T KEY PANEL EXPANSION RS485 SPARE DATA ANALOG OUTPUTS DIGITAL INPUTS gt 1PJ8 3 Pin
192. imulates the activation of the digital inputs in the instrument which triggers the respective action This function code is used to set a single action to either ON or OFF The request specifies the address of the action to be forced Actions are addressed starting at zero Therefore action number 1 is addressed as 0 The requested ON OFF state is specified by a constant in the request data field A value of 0xFF00 requests the action to be ON A value of 0x0000 requests it to be OFF All other values are illegal and will not affect the output The normal response is an echo of the request returned after the state has been written Request Function code 1 Byte 0x05 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument Output Value 2 Bytes 0x0000 or OxFFOO Response Function code 1 Byte 0x05 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument Output Value 2 Bytes 0x0000 or OxFFOO Error Response Function code 1 Byte Function code 0x80 Exception code 1 Byte 01 IIlegal Function 02 Illegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Model 42 Instruction Manual C 7 MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported MODBUS Parameters Supported C 8 Model 42 Instruction Manual Here is an example of a request to write Coil 5 ON Request Field Name Hex Function 05 Dutput Address Hi 00 Output Address Lo 05 Output Value Hi FF Output Value Lo 00 Response Field Name Hex Function 05 Output Ad
193. in Qo flow rate of gas scc min during span mode K constant for the specific permeant 24 45 MW MW molecular weight K NO 0 532 Oven Installation and Use the following procedure to install and configure the permeation oven Configuration 1 Physically install the permeation oven and valves into the instrument and connect the cables and plumbing 2 From the Perm Oven Settings menu in the Service menu select Perm Oven Selection then select 45 C 9 4 Model 427 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Optional Equipment Internal Permeation Span Source Remove the thermistor from POJ1 on the measurement interface board Connect a resistance of approximately 4 2 KQ across pins 1 and 2 of POJI Go to the Factory Cal Gas Therm menu from the Perm Oven Settings menu in the Service menu Select Low Point enter the exact value of the resistor and press to calibrate the low resistance point Press Cm to return to the Factory Cal Gas Therm menu Connect a resistance of approximately 5 KQ across pins 1 and 2 of POJ1 Go to the High Point screen enter the exact value of the resistor and press to calibrate the high resistance point Press Cm to return to the Factory Cal Gas Therm menu Remove resistor from POJ1 and re attach the gas thermistor Connect a resistance of approximately 4 2 KQ across pins 3 and 4 of POJ3 Go to t
194. in sample probe line Verify accuracy of multipoint calibration source gas Check for variable dilution Excessive response time Partially blocked sample capillary Hang up blockage in sample filter Unplug power cord Clean or replace capillary Change element Improper converter operation Questionable calibration gas Converter temperature too high or too low Low line voltage Molybdenum consumed Verify accuracy Temperature should be approximately 325 C for Molybdenum 625 C for stainless steel Check to see if line voltage is within specifications Replace Molybdenum converter cartridge Model 42 Instruction Manual 6 3 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides 6 4 Model 427 Instruction Manual Table 6 2 Troubleshooting Alarm Messages Alarm Message Alarm Internal Temp Possible Cause Check fan operation Check fan filter Action Replace fan if not operating properly Clean or replace foam filter refer to Preventive Maintenance chapter in this manual Alarm Chamber Temp Chamber temperature below set point of 50 C Check 10K ohm thermistor replace if bad Check temperature control board to insure the LEDs are coming on If not temperature control board could be defective Alarm Cooler Temp Cooler reads 80 C Check fan operation Check fan filter Bad cooler Cooler does not hold set point of 3 C Cooler reads 20 C
195. ings The Permeation Oven Settings menu is used for setting up and calibrating the permeation oven option The permeation oven settings are visible only if the permeation oven option installed and when the calibrator is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Perm Oven Settings Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A Wi hid CHRD CHET TA TEN cH E IA Bast ade PME bee TEEN EE EN EEE TE oa Calibrate Gas Thermistor The Calibrate Gas Thermistor menu is used for calibrating the permeation oven gas thermistor using a water bath or known resistance e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Perm Oven Settings gt Cal Gas Thermistor PTET H a Tb Bone i Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual 3 85 Operation Service Menu Water Bath The Calibrate Gas Thermistor Water Bath screen is used to view and set the permeation oven gas temperature to a known temperature value e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Perm Oven Settings gt Cal Gas Thermistor gt Water Bath Resistor The Calibrate Gas Thermistor Resistor screen is used to view and set the permeation oven gas thermistor resistance to a known resistor value e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Perm Oven Settings gt Cal Gas Thermistor gt Known Resistor Calibrate Oven Thermistor The Cali
196. ion Manual 9 9 Optional Equipment Ozonator Permeation Dryer Ozonator Permeation Dryer Sample Permeation Dryer Lag Volume Principle of Operation 9 10 Model 42 Instruction Manual 2 Determine the permeation rate for the permeation tube in the Transfer Standard or install a certified permeation tube 3 Allow the permeation tubes in both the 42 and the Transfer Standard to stabilize for at least 24 48 hours 4 Carefully calibrate the 427 using the Transfer Standard The output of the Transfer Standard should be connected to the SAMPLE bulkhead on the rear panel of the 427 5 Switch the calibrated 42 into the span mode 6 Measure the flow rate into the ZERO bulkhead on the rear panel of the 42i Be sure that the source of zero air is connected Note the flow and measured NO concentration 7 From the flow and measured concentration compute the permeation tube release rate The permeation dryer minimizes routing maintenance procedures by providing a continuous stream of dry air to the ozonator using the selective water permeation characteristics of the dryer With the permeation dryer option it is not necessary to constantly replenish the ozonator air drying column as in the standard instrument The sample permeation dryer option is used when there may be widely varying levels of ambient water vapor present The dryer stabilizes the moisture content of the sample stream providing a constant dew point at the outle
197. ion Manual C 5 MODBUS Protocol Function Codes C 6 Model 42 Instruction Manual Request Function code Starting Address Quantity of Registers Response Function code Byte count Register value N Quantity of Registers Error Response Function code Exception code 1 Byte 2 Bytes 2 Bytes 1 Byte 1 Byte N x 2 Bytes 1 Byte 1 Byte 0x03 or 0x04 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument 1 to maximum allowed by instrument 0x03 or 0x04 2xN N N or N 1 Function code 0x80 01 IIlegal Function 02 Illegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Here is an example of a request and response to read registers 10 13 Request Field Name Function Starting Address Hi Starting Address Lo No of Registers Hi No of Registers Lo Response Field Name Function Byte Count Register value Hi 10 Register value Lo 10 Register value Hi 11 Hex 0x03 0x00 0x09 0x00 0x04 Hex 0x03 0x06 0x02 0x2B 0x00 Thermo Fisher Scientific 0x05 Force Write Thermo Fisher Scientific Single Coil MODBUS Protocol Function Codes Register value Lo 11 0x00 Register value Hi 12 0x00 Register value Lo 12 0x64 Register value Hi 13 0x00 Register value Lo 13 0x64 The contents of register 10 are shown as the two byte values of 0x02 0x2B Then contents of registers 11 13 are 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x64 and 0x00 0x64 respectively The force write single coil function s
198. ion standard and the NO impurity NO Concentration Standard A cylinder containing 10 to 50 ppm NO in Nz with less than 1 ppm NO 4 4 Model 427 Instruction Manual is usually used as the concentration standard The cylinder must be traceable to a National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST NO in N2 Standard Reference Material or NO Standard Reference Material Procedures for certifying the NO cylinder working standard against an NIST traceable NO or NO standard and for determining the amount of NO impurity are given in EPA Publication No EPA 600 4 75 003 Technical Assistance Document for the Chemiluminescence Measurement of Nitrogen Dioxide Thermo Fisher Scientific Assaying a Working NO Standard Against a NIST traceable NO Thermo Fisher Scientific Standard Calibration Equipment Required In addition the procedure for the certification of a NO working standard against an NIST traceable NO standard and determination of the amount of NO impurity in the working standard is reproduced here The cylinder should be re certified on a regular basis as determined by the local quality control program Use the NIST traceable NO standard and the GPT calibration procedure to calibrate the NO NO and NO responses of the instrument Also determine the converter efficiency of the analyzer Refer to the calibration procedure in this manual and in the Code of Federal Regulations Title 40 Part 50 Appendix F for exact
199. ion value in currently selected gas units represented as exponential representation with 4 characters mantissa and 2 characters exponent each with sign Mantissa sign and 4 digits The decimal point is assumed to be after the first digit and is not transmitted Exponent sign and 2 digits Example 5384000 0 is represented as 5384 06 0 04567 is represented as 4567 02 lt status gt is formed by lt operating status gt and lt error status gt and separated by a space i e lt operating status gt lt SP gt lt error status gt Each of the two lt operating status gt and lt error status gt are formed by two characters each representing a 2 digit hex number which is one byte 8 Bits operation status and one byte 8 Bits error status These two bytes contain the information about the main operating conditions of the instrument at that instant For details on how to interpret the status bytes refer to Table D 1 and Table D 2 below lt SFKT gt is the space provided for future use for special function it currently contains a string of ten 0 s i e lt 0000000000 gt Model 42 Instruction Manual D 5 Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol Geysitech Commands Measurements reported in response to DA command Single Range Mode Dual Auto Range Mode Operating and Error D 6 Model 42 Instruction Manual Status Example Geysitech Protocol with transmission of three concentrations Instrument ID is 1 Ope
200. ive 2002 96 EC WEEE and the pl equipment that has been put on the market after 13 August 2005 4 Service is available from exclusive distributors worldwide Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com agi 1 866 282 0430 Toll Free 1 508 520 0430 International Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Contents Introducir aaa 1 1 Principle ot Operation arsos nan cn de le 1 2 A sea ties tered em aeee E 1 3 DEAS Cea LACT io 2 1 Eea ge Re a ce PRN PATS E L A EDL EO Pat ES 2 1 Unpacking and Inspection iia 2 1 Setup Proceder iaa 2 3 Connecting External Devices variar 2 5 Terminal Board PCB Assemblies cnn inicio dis 2 5 I O Terminal Boada ina 2 5 D O Terminal Borda ia 2 7 25 Pip Terminal Board naco id 2 8 SEP A ode hang secemuniateiss 2 9 A AA ANO 3 1 Displayen hanna ea E AAT A RENER REN 3 1 P shb ttons in 3 2 Soft Keys ani 3 3 Software Overview A id 3 4 Power UD asias 3 6 R n e a O ota 3 6 A etiri ada be Nvatwoct hata ean Att aaah a aE 3 7 Range Menu did da 3 8 Single Range Moderna acid 3 8 Dual Range Mode E nie 3 9 Auto Raros Mode todas 3 11 GiS Unite elene shied ause vend e tu cdace dy E a SR 3 13 NO NO and NO Radges osisitnrsii dates 3 13 Set Cust n RANEES setenta 3 15 CUSCO Ranges AAA a na 3 16 AVERAGING TIME iia 3 16 Calibration Factors ME Ri 3 17 NO and NO Backgrounds o 3 18 NO
201. l 7 46 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 8 System Description This chapter describes the function and location of the system components provides an overview of the software structure and includes a description of the system electronics and input output connections and functions as follows e Hardware on page 8 1 e Software on page 8 4 e Electronics on page 8 6 e I O Components on page 8 9 Hardware Model 42 hardware components Figure 8 1 include e NO to NO converter e Mode solenoid e Reaction chamber e Optical filter e Pressure transducer e Sample flow sensor e Ozonator e Ozone flow switch e Photomultiplier tube e Photomultiplier tube cooler e Pump e Sample capillary e Dry air capillary Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 8 1 System Description NO2 to NO Converter Converter Flow Reaction Transducer Chamber PMT Assembly ow Scurbber Switch Capillaries 2 Pressure Transducer Input Board HVPS Pump Measurement Interface Board 1 0 Expansion Board Opt Power Supply Ozonator Ozonator Transfomer Solenoid Motherboard Digital Output Board Figure 8 1 Hardware Components NO to NO Converter The NO to NO converter heats molybdenum to approximately 325 C in y pp y order to convert and detect NO The converter consists of an insulated h
202. l temperature alarm limits in degrees C The example below sets the internal temperature alarm maximum value to 35 0 C Send set internal temp alarm max 35 Receive set internal temp alarm max 35 ok alarm pressure min alarm pressure max These commands report the pressure alarm minimum and maximum value current settings The example below reports that the pressure alarm minimum value is 150 mmHg Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual B 15 C Link Protocol Commands Alarms B 16 Model 42 Instruction Manual Send alarm pressure min Receive alarm pressure min 150 mmHg set alarm pressure min value set alarm pressure max value These commands set the pressure alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing pressure alarm limits in millimeters of mercury The example below sets the pressure alarm maximum value to 290 mmHg Send set alarm pressure max 290 Receive set alarm pressure max 290 ok alarm sample flow min alarm sample flow max These commands report the sample flow alarm minimum and maximum value current settings The example below reports that the sample flow alarm minimum value is 0 300 LPM Send alarm sample flow min Receive alarm sample flow min 0 3 1 min set alarm sample flow min value set alarm sample flow max value These commands set the sample flow alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representi
203. l the optional permeation tube Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation 1 Remove the oven cover 2 Remove the glass chamber assembly by loosening the white plastic retaining collar loosening not removing the knurled screw and gently pulling the assembly upward Completely remove the oven 3 Separate the glass chamber from the top assembly by twisting and gently pulling the glass away from the top Note Keep the glass clean when handling it A 4 Place the permeation tube s in the glass chamber 5 Attach the glass chamber to the top assembly by gently pushing the two together with a slight twisting motion Model 42 Instruction Manual 9 3 Optional Equipment Internal Permeation Span Source 6 Replace the glass chamber assembly into the oven until the top of the assembly is flush or slightly below the top of the oven Equipment Damage Do not use tools to tighten the knurled screw in the following step A 7 Tighten the knurled screw finger tight Do not use tools to tighten 8 Tighten the white plastic retaining collar 9 Replace the oven cover being careful to place the tubing and wiring into the cover slot Computation of The computation of NO output level is shown in the following Concentrations information Note that is assumed that all devices are properly calibrated and that all flows are corrected to 25 C and 1 atm Permeation Tube R K Output ppm Q Where R permeation rate in ng m
204. ls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select SREC LREC 3 28 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu WH mri View Logged Data The View Logged Data screen is used to select the start point to view the logged data by number of records or date and time e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select SREC or LREC gt View Logged Data Number of Records The Number of Records screen is used to select the starting point to display the number of records back to view The Record Display screen read only displays the selected records Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 29 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Erer ri prn E CH Pi Tal DH Cil BEEP Sonal Bone BUEN Saad Haat ake POE Saad aoe Pi EE EE Date and Time The Date and Time screen is used to set a start date and time for which to view logged data For example if 20 JUN 2005 10 00 is entered then the first logged data record that is displayed is the first record after this time If set to one minute logging this would be at 20 JUN 2005 10 01 EH priori Bet pihe fiini i The Record Display screen read only displays the selected records he EEE Erase Log The Erase Log is used to erase all saved data for the selected record type not all short records and long records e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Dat
205. m to display the Main Menu then choose Instrument Controls gt Ozonator b Press to toggle the ozonator ON c Press gt to return to the Run screen 3 Be sure the instrument is in the auto mode that is NO NO and NO measurements are being displayed on the front panel display If the instrument is not in auto mode a Press to display the Main Menu then choose Instrument Controls gt Auto Manual Mode b Select NO NOx and press e c Press gt to return to the Run screen 4 Select NO NO and NO ranges and push the AVG soft key to display the Averaging Time screen It is recommended that a higher averaging time be used for best results For more information about the ranges or averaging time see the Operation chapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration Note The averaging time should be less than the zero duration and less than the span duration A 5 Set the calibration pressure to the current reactor pressure a Press to display the Main Menu then choose Diagnostics gt Pressure Make a note of the current chamber pressure b Press twice choose gt Calibration Factors gt Cal Pressure c Use l to increment decrement the value to match the current reactor pressure and press to save the new calibration pressure value 6 Verify that any filters used during normal monitoring are also used during calibration 7 If required connect the
206. meas mode This command reports which measurement mode NO NO NO or NO is active The example below reports that the measurement mode is set to NO Send meas mode Receive meas mode no set meas mode mode mode no nox no nox pre This command sets the instrument to NO NO auto mode manual NO mode or manual NO mode The example below sets the instrument to the manual NO mode Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration Send set meas mode no Receive set meas mode no ok pres comp This command reports whether pressure compensation is on or off The example below shows that pressure compensation is on Send pres comp Receive pres comp on set pres comp onoff These commands turn the pressure compensation on or off The example below turns pressure compensation off Send set pres comp off Receive set pres comp off ok temp comp This command reports whether temperature compensation is on or off The example below shows the temperature compensation is off Send temp comp Receive temp comp off set temp comp onoff These commands turn the temperature compensation on or off The example below turns temperature compensation off Send set temp comp off Receive set temp comp off ok Hardwa re contrast This command reports the screen s level of contrast The example below Co nfiguration shows the screen contrast is 50 according to Table B 8 Send contrast
207. menu lists three custom ranges C1 C2 and C3 Custom ranges are user defined ranges In the standard range mode any value between 50 ppb 0 05 ppm and 20 000 ppb 20 ppm can be specified as a range In the 1g m mg m mode any value between 100 pg m 0 1 mg m and 30 000 g m 30 mg m can be specified as a range In the extended range mode any value between 200 ppb 0 02 ppm and 100 000 ppb 100 ppm can be specified as a range In the pg m mg m mode any value between 500 g m 0 5 mg m and 150 000 ug m 150 mg m can be specified as a range e Inthe Main Menu choose Range gt Set Custom Ranges prh Ea Mh ny i Toi mi DN EEE TE oa Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 15 Operation Averaging Time Custom Ranges Averaging Time 3 16 Model 42 Instruction Manual The Custom Ranges screen is used to define the custom ranges The display shows the current custom range The next line of the display is used to set the range To use the custom full scale range be sure to select it Custom range 1 2 or 3 in the NO NO or NO Ranges screen For more information about selecting ranges see NO NO2 and NOx Ranges above e Inthe Main Menu choose Range gt Set Custom Ranges gt Custom range 1 2 or 3 The Averaging Time defines a time period 10 to 300 seconds over which NO NO and NO measurements are taken The average concentration of the NO NOs and NO readings are calculated for
208. n ppb parts per million ppm micrograms per cubic meter 1g m or milligrams per cubic meter mg m are available The pg m and mg m gas concentration modes are calculated using a standard pressure of 760 mmHg and a standard temperature of 20 C When switching the selected units from ppb or ppm to g m or mg m the analog ranges all default to the highest range in that mode For example when switching from mg m to ppm all the ranges default to 20 ppm Therefore whenever you change units you should also check the range settings e Inthe Main Menu choose Range gt Gas Units Note If the units change from ppb ppm to ug m mg m or vice versa the instrument should be re calibrated particularly if the user s standard temperature is different from 20 C A display warning will appear that ranges will be defaulted and calibration parameters reset A RO Ea Cdra Py Tit MATTE mid La The NO NO and NO Ranges screen defines the concentration range of the analog outputs For example a NO range of 0 50 ppb restricts the NO analog output to concentrations between 0 and 50 ppb The display shows the current NO NO2 or NO range The next line of the display is used to change the range The range screen is similar for the single dual and auto range modes The only difference between the screens are the words High and Low to indicate which range is displayed The example below shows the NO range screen in singl
209. n E AEAEE eas 4 8 Cabra ata 4 9 Connect GPT Apparatus to the Analyzer ooononnonnnnonononnnnnnncnnnnnnnono 4 10 Adjust instrumentado ada llas 4 10 Set NO and NO Background to Zero ias 4 10 Model 42i Instruction Manual ix Contents Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 x Model 42 Instruction Manual Calibrate the NO Channel to the NO Calibration Gas 4 12 Calibrate the NO Channel to the NO Calibration Gas 4 12 Preparing NO NO and NO Calibration Curves cooocononcnono 4 13 Alternative Calibration Procedure Using NO Permeation Tube 4 16 Calibration in Dual Range and Auto Range Mode coocoooccccconicinncnnnnnnss 4 16 Set NO and NO Background Readings to Zero oooocccccnoncnnnnnoncnnons 4 16 Calibrate aw NO a a 4 17 Calibrate Low NO ari 4 18 Calibrate Low NO oia 4 18 Calibrate High NO corsa stilo 4 19 Calibrate High NO nana lada 4 19 Calibrate loa ct Os 4 20 Zero and Span A O NN 4 21 Preventive Maintenance 000 aa 5 1 e A E NE a ear cea eee 5 1 FRE DIAC EMC Ite AN ca Pestle O E E acral 5 2 Cleaning the Outside Case 5 2 Ozonator Air Feed Drying Column Replacement s sssseseseseseeeeeseseessess 5 2 Capillaries Inspection and Replacement ici iii 5 2 Thermoelectric Cooler Fins Inspection and Cleaning essere 5 4 Fan Filters Inspection and Ciemat 5 4 Pump Rebuilding arrian le neh E SE ae 5 5 Troublesho0 Id rai 6 1 Safety Drs a A isa RS 6 1 Troubleshooting Cuide ts as 6 1 Board Level Connection
210. n if the instrument is locked e In the Main Menu choose Password gt Unlock Instrument Pra Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 93 Equipment Required Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 4 Calibration This chapter describes procedures for performing a multipoint calibration of the Model 427 The information described here is considered adequate to perform the calibration However if greater detail is desired the user is referred to the Code of Federal Regulations Title 40 Part 50 Appendix F The calibration technique is based on the rapid gas phase reaction between NO and O which produces stoichiometric quantities of NO in accordance with the reaction NO 0 gt NO 0 The quantitative nature of this reaction is such that when the NO concentration is known the concentration of NO can be determined Ozone is added to excess NO in a dynamic calibration system and the NO channel of the chemiluminescence NO NO NO analyzer is used as an indicator of changes in NO concentration When Os is added the decrease in NO concentration observed on the calibrated NO channel is equivalent to the concentration of NO produced Adding variable amounts of O3 from a stable O3 generator can change the amount of NO generated The following sections discuss the required apparatus and procedures for calibrating the instrument e Equipment Required on page 4 1 e Pre Calibration on page 4 8 e
211. n the range of 200 to 500 cc Compute Fo as NO _ NO lsTp X FNo X VRC ES 2 75 i Compute tr as VRC to Fo Fno Verify that tr lt 2 minutes If not select a reaction chamber with a smaller Vac Compute the diluent air flow rate as Fp Fr Fo Fno If Fo turns out to be impractical for the desired system select a reaction chamber having a different Vrc and recompute Fp and Fo Model 42i Instruction Manual 4 7 Calibration Pre Calibration Pre Calibration 4 8 Model 42i Instruction Manual Perform the following pre calibration procedure before calibrating the Model 42 For detailed information about the menu parameters and the icons used in these procedures see the Operation chapter Note The calibration and calibration check duration times should be long enough to account for the transition purge process when switching from sample to zero and from zero to span This transition time is the time required to purge the existing air A Depending on the plumbing configuration and the instrument data from approximately the first minute of a zero calibration or check should be disregarded because of residual sample air Also data from approximately the first minute of a span calibration or check should be disregarded because the span is mixing with the residual zero air A 1 Allow the instrument to warm up and stabilize 2 Be sure the ozonator is ON If the ozonator is not ON a Press C
212. nalog currents via a connector located on the rear panel of the instrument It contains local power supplies a DC DC isolator supply a sub processor and analog circuits Eight analog voltage inputs are provided with an input Thermo Fisher Scientific Front Panel Connector Board 1 0 Components Analog Voltage Thermo Fisher Scientific Outputs System Description 1 0 Components voltage range of OV to 10VDC Six current outputs are provided with a normal operating range of 0 to 20 mA The front panel connector board interfaces between the motherboard and the front panel mounted function key panel and Graphics display It serves as central location to tie the three connectors required for the function key panel the graphics display control lines and the graphics display backlight to a single ribbon cable extending back to the motherboard This board also includes signal buffers for the graphics display control signals and a high voltage power supply for the graphics display backlight External I O is driven from a generic bus that is capable of controlling the following devices e Analog output voltage and current e Analog input voltage e Digital output TTL levels e Digital input TTL levels The instrument has spare solenoid valve drivers and I O support for future expansion 5 Note The instrument has spare solenoid valve drivers and I O support for future expansion A The instrument provides six analog voltag
213. nc nox min alarm conc no max alarm conc no2 max alarm conc nox max These commands report the NO NO and NO concentration alarm minimum and maximum values current setting The example below reports that the NO concentration minimum is 5 2 ppb Send alarm conc no min Receive alarm conc no min 5 2 ppb set alarm conc no min value set alarm conc no2 min value set alarm conc nox min value set alarm conc no max value set alarm conc no2 max value set alarm conc nox max value These commands set the NO NO and NO concentration alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point representation of the concentration alarm limits Values must be in the units that are currently set for use The example below sets the NO concentration alarm maximum value to 215 Send set alarm conc no max 215 Receive set alarm conc no max 215 ok alarm converter temp min alarm converter temp max These commands report the converter temperature alarm minimum and maximum value current settings The example below reports that the converter temperature alarm minimum value is 300 0 C Send alarm chamber temp min Receive alarm chamber temp min 300 0 deg C set alarm converter temp min value set alarm converter temp max value These commands set the converter temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing converter temperature alarm limits in degrees C The exampl
214. nd SUI A D 2 Block Checksum DE Esa wa tomioltenteieckdohe D 3 Geysitech Commands AA O NEEE e D 3 Instrument Control Command ST oooooccconononanininonanocinaninaninananan ns D 3 Data Sampling Data Query Command DA ssssseeeeeseerrrreerrereeseee D 4 Measurements reported in response to DA command eee D 6 Single Range Modernitas sai didas D 6 Dual Auto Range Mode sarna das D 6 Operating and Error Stain pica o dd eaten eee ea D 6 xiv Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Figures Figure 1 1 Model 427 Flow Schematic o cooocincocinconinconincononcnnonccnrnccnrnrnnnnoos 1 3 Figure 2 1 Remove the Packing Material o ooooocociiconccicincncininoncncnrnnnonoooso 2 2 Figure 2 2 Remove the Shipping Screws ocooiccocinccnnnccninccnrnccnoninornccnrncnonos 2 2 Figure 2 3 Model 42i Rear Panel ooooooococcociccccccconocococonranncnncnrnnconornrororannononoso 2 3 Figure 2 4 Atmospheric Dump Bypass PluMbiNQ oocononococncninininnonrnnnoooo 2 4 Figure 2 5 0 Terminal Board Views ooooociooncicconinconinconinccnrnccnrncnnrnccnrnnnnoos 2 6 Figure 2 6 D O Terminal Board Views 2 7 Figure 2 7 25 Pin Terminal Board ViQWS ooooociccococciccococcnnnonocncnrnnnnocoronnononoso 2 8 Figure 3 1 Front Panel Display o oooocociconoccnonnnonnonocncnrncnonocnronnonororonnozoroso 3 2 Figure 3 2 Front Panel PUSADUTLONS oooocociconoccnnnncncncnnnn
215. nds report the last long and short records stored or the dynamic data record In the example below the command requests a long record with no checksum in ASCII format with text For details on how to decode the flag fields within these records see the flags command Send 1r01 Receive 1r01 12 31 02 22 03 flags 54089100 no 8413E 1 nox 8485E 1 lono 6471E 1 lonox 6527E 1 pres 130 9 pmtt 53 2 intt 80 0 rctt 80 0 convt 61 smplf 0 500 ozonf 0 000 pmtv 115 erec This command returns a brief description of the main operating conditions at the time the command is issued i e dynamic data The example below shows a typical response The format is defined by the current settings of format and erec format commands For details on how to decode the flag fields within these records see the flags command Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual B 19 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging Send erec Receive erec 10 11 04 06 05 flags DD008000 no 0 000 nox 0 000 no2 0 000 1 lono 147 500 lonox 0 000 lono2 0 000 1 pmtv 805 491 tempal 1 pres 172 278 pcal 150 000 smplf 0 000 ozonf 0 050 hiavgtime 10 loavgtime 10 nobkg 0 000 noxbkg 0 000 nocoef 1 000 noxcoef 1 000 no2coef 1 000 lonocoef 1 000 lonoxcoef 1 000 lono2coef 1 000 norange 100000 000 noxrange 100000 000 no2range 100000 000 lonorange 100000 000 lonoxrange 100000 000 lono2range 100000 000 lrec srec lrec xxxx yy SIeC XXXX yy lrec aa bb 00 pp qq
216. nescence Before the analyzer sets the NO and NO readings to zero it stores these values as the NO and NO background corrections respectively The NO background correction is determined from the NO and NO background corrections and is not displayed The background corrections are typically below 15 ppb The NO and NO Background screens are used to perform a manual zero calibration of the instrument Before performing a zero calibration allow the analyzer to sample zero air until stable readings are obtained The NO channel should be calibrated first Both the NO and NO Background screens operate the same way Therefore the following description of the NO background applies to the NOx background screen as well The first line of the display shows the current NO reading The second line of the display shows the NO background correction that is stored in memory The NO background correction is a value expressed in the current gas units that is subtracted from the NO reading to produce the NO reading that is displayed In the example below the analyzer is displayed 4 4 ppb of NO while sampling zero air A background correction is 0 0 ppb means that 0 ppb is being subtracted from the NO concentration being displayed Therefore the background correction must be increased to 4 4 ppb in order for the NO reading to be at 0 ppb i e a NO reading of 4 4 ppb minus a NO background reading of 4 4 ppb gives the corrected NO reading of 0 ppb To se
217. net port B 39 alarm chamber Reports sets chamber temperature alarm maximum value B 13 temp max alarm chamber Reports sets chamber temperature alarm minimum value B 13 temp min alarm conc no max Reports sets current NO concentration alarm maximum value B 14 alarm conc no min Reports sets current NO concentration alarm minimum value B 14 alarm conc no2 max Reports sets current NO concentration alarm maximum B 14 value alarm conc no2 min Reports sets current NO concentration alarm minimum value B 14 alarm conc nox max Reports sets current NO concentration alarm maximum B 14 value alarm conc noxmin Reports sets current NO concentration alarm minimum value B 14 alarm converter Reports sets NO converter temperature alarm maximum B 14 temp max value alarm converter Reports sets NO converter temperature alarm minimum B 14 temp min value alarm cooler temp Reports sets PMT cooler temperature alarm maximum value B 15 max alarm cooler temp Reports sets PMT cooler temperature alarm minimum value B 15 min alarm internal temp Reports sets internal temperature alarm maximum value B 15 max alarm internal temp Reports sets internal temperature alarm minimum value B 15 min alarm pressure max Reports sets pressure alarm maximum value B 15 alarm pressure min Reports sets pressure alarm minimum value B 15 alarm sample flow Reports sets sample flow alarm maximum value B 16 max alarm sample flow Reports sets sample flow alarm minimum value B 16 min alarm trig
218. ng sample flow alarm limits in liters per minute The example below sets the sample flow alarm maximum value to 1 LPM Send set alarm sample flow max 1 Receive set alarm sample flow max 1 ok alarm trig conc no alarm trig conc no2 alarm trig conc nox This command reports the NO NO and NO concentration alarm trigger action for minimum alarm current setting to either floor or ceiling The example below shows the NO concentration minimum alarm trigger to ceiling according to Table B 3 Send alarm trig conc no Receive alarm trig conc no 1 set alarm trig conc no value set alarm trig conc no2 value set alarm trig conc nox value These commands set the NO NO and NO concentration alarm minimum value where value is set to either floor or ceiling according to Thermo Fisher Scientific Diagnostics Datalogging Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Diagnostics Table B 3 The example below sets the NO concentration minimum alarm trigger to ceiling Send set alarm trig conc no 1 Receive set alarm trig conc no 1 ok Table B 3 Alarm Trigger Values Value Alarm Trigger 00 Floor 01 Ceiling diag volt mb This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the motherboard The sequence of voltages is Positive 24 positive 15 positive 5 positive 3 3 and negative 3 3 Each voltage value is separated by a space Send diag volt mb Receive diag volt mb 24 1 14 9 4 9 3 2 3 2 diag
219. nnccncnrnnnnnororonoonoooso 3 2 Figure 3 3 Flowchart of Menu Driven Software o oococicoocincoinconincnnrnccninncosos 3 5 Figure 3 4 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector in Single Range Mode 3 9 Figure 3 5 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector in Dual Range Mode 3 10 Figure 3 6 Analog Output in Auto Range Mode ocoo icoc iconnininicoooo 3 11 Figure 3 7 Pin Out of Rear Connector in Auto Range Mode 3 12 a GPT SV Ste A A ots 4 3 Figure 5 1 Inspecting and Replacing the Capillaries 5 3 Figure 5 2 Inspecting and Cleaning the Fan Filters cece 5 5 Figure 5 3 Rebuilding the PUMP o oocooicoconcconncncnccnnnonocncnrnnnonocornnnonororannonoooso 5 7 Figure 6 1 Board Level Connection Diagram Common Electronics 6 6 Figure 6 2 Board Level Connection Diagram Measurement System 6 7 Figure 7 1 Properly Grounded Antistatic Wrist Strap ocinio 7 4 Figure 7 2 Component LayOUt o ooiooociccocinconinconincononccnrncnrornncnrnnonrnonornccornnnonos 1 7 Figure 7 3 Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Pal e a a a aa r aa a S SAS 7 8 Figure 7 4 Replacing the PUMP oooococociciconoconnnococinnnonnncoronnonocornononocornnnononoso 7 10 Figure 7 5 Replacing the Fan oociococoocicicccccnonnnncncnrnnnonocoronnonororonnonororonnonooss 7 11 Figure 7 6 PMT Cooler and R
220. nonornnnornconrncnncnonnnncnnnnos B 32 Table B 7 Extended AE a B 32 Table B 8 Contrast LevelS ooooooocicciciciciciinonocnoconconconooroornocnrnornornornooos B 36 Table B 9 Reply Termination Formats oocococicicococonncncocinrnnnncncnronononrnronnonos B 41 Table B 10 Analog Current Output Range Values ooconinoinincinncinicccnno B 43 Table B 11 Analog Voltage Output Range Values oooononoiciccinicccninncnno B 44 Table B 12 Default Output AssignM BNt oococicincicionicincincncnnincnncnonocnnnncnnnnoo B 45 Table C 1 REA dt tadas C 8 Table C 2 Read Registers for AZd ooocococicoiccoccocoonionoonononnocnnoonoornonnononnorornooos C 9 Table C 3 Write Coils OE Aa C 11 Table D 1 Operating Status for Model 42i oocococonciciociccocincocinccnrnccnrnnnnrnnnnoos D 7 Table D 2 Error Status for Model 42i oo cccccsceseeseeseeesteseeseesessestesteseeses D 7 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 1 Introduction The Model 427 Chemiluminescence NO NO2 NO Analyzer combines proven detection technology easy to use menu driven software and advanced diagnostics to offer unsurpassed flexibility and reliability The Model 427 has the following features e 320 x 240 graphics display e Menu driven software e Field programmable ranges e User selectable single dual auto range modes e Multiple user defined analog outputs e Analog input options e High sensitivity e Fast response time
221. nputs 0x02 Read Holding Registers 0x03 Read Input Registers 0x04 Force Write Single Coil 0x05 0x06 Read Exception Status If a function code is received that is not in this list an invalid function exception is returned The data field varies depending on the function For more description of these data fields see Function Codes below In MODBUS over Serial an error check is included in the message This is not necessary in MODBUS over TCP IP because the higher level protocols ensure error free transmission The error check is a two byte 16 bit CRC value This section describes the various function codes that are supported by the Model 42i Read Coils Inputs read the status of the digital outputs relays in the instrument Issuing either of these function codes will generate the same response These requests specify the starting address i e the address of the first output specified and the number of outputs The outputs are addressed starting at zero Therefore outputs numbered 1 16 are addressed as 0 15 Model 42 Instruction Manual C 3 MODBUS Protocol Function Codes C 4 Model 42 Instruction Manual The outputs in the response message are packed as one per bit of the data field Status is indicated as 1 Active on and 0 Inactive off The LSB of the first data byte contains the output addressed in the query The other outputs follow toward the high end of this byte and from low order to high or
222. nt Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter Use the following procedure to replace the PMT tube Equipment Required Photomultiplier tube and PMT base Nut driver 5 16 inch Flat blade screwdriver Philips screwdriver small Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the high voltage cable from the PMT power supply and unplug the BNC cable from the Input Board Model 42 Instruction Manual 7 13 Servicing PMT High Voltage Power Supply Replacement PMT High Voltage Power Supply Replacement 7 14 Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 Remove six external screws holding PMT cover plate and the four screws holding the PMT shroud to the panel and remove the PMT cover plate Figure 7 7 If the cooler fan is attached unplug the fan power cord if necessary i og PMT Cover Plate Screws 6 o4 PMT Shroud Screws 4 PMT Base Screws 3 PMT Base Assembly Figure 7 7 Replacing the PMT 4 Remove the three retaining screws holding PMT base assembly to the cooler using a 5 16 inch nut driver Equipment Damage Do not point the photomultiplier tube at a light source This can permanently damage the tube A 5 Pull the PMT and PMT base from
223. nt the status of the ozonator PMT pressure and temperature compensation status gas units gas mode and alarms To decode the flags each hexadecimal digit is converted to binary as shown in the Figure B 1 It is the binary digits that define the status of each parameter In the example below the instrument is reporting that the ozonator and PMT are both on and that the instrument is in the span gas mode Send flags Receive flags 80028000 Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Alarms ll Figure B 1 Flags Alarm alarm chamber temp min arms alarm chamber temp max These commands report the chamber temperature alarm minimum and maximum value current settings The example below reports that the chamber temperature alarm minimum value is 47 0 C Send alarm chamber temp min Receive alarm chamber temp min 47 0 deg C set alarm chamber temp min value set alarm chamber temp max value These commands set the chamber temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing chamber temperature alarm limits in degrees C The example below sets the chamber temperature alarm maximum value to 50 0 C Send set alarm chamber temp max 50 0 Receive set alarm chamber temp max 50 0 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual B 13 C Link Protocol Commands Alarms B 14 Model 42 Instruction Manual alarm conc no min alarm conc no2 min alarm co
224. ntistatic wrist strap f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 7 10 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber Assembly Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber Assembly Replacement 2 Remove the fan guard from the fan and remove the filter 3 Pull the power connectors off the fan 4 Remove the four fan mounting screws and remove the fan 5 Install a new fan following the previous steps in reverse Mounting Screws 4 ol Fan Guard A Figure 7 5 Replacing the Fan Use the following procedure to replace the PMT cooler and reaction chamber assembly see Figure 7 6 Equipment Required PMT cooler Wrench 7 16 inch Wrench 9 16 inch Nut driver 1 4 inch Philips screwdriver Wire cutters Model 42 Instruction Manual 7 11 Servicing PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber Assembly Replacement Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Refer to Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter to lower the partition panel then proceed to the next step below 2 Disconnect the reaction
225. nverter Replacement PMT Cooler O Ring 2 034 x 2 a Se Viton Spacer 0 gi o Reaction Chamber Rear x Y Red Filter gt Quartz rome O Ring 2 127 S S Figure 7 9 Cleaning or Removing the Reaction Chamber NO to NO Converter Use the following procedure to replace the converter Figure 7 10 Replacement Equipment Required NO to NO Converter Wrench 7 16 inch Wrench 9 16 inch Wrench 1 2 inch Wrench 5 8 inch Screwdriver Nut driver 1 4 inch Nut driver 5 16 inch 7 18 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing NO2 to NO Converter Replacement CAUTION Avoid contact with converter heated components Allow converter to cool to room temperature before handling converter components A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Allow converter to cool to room temperature to prevent contact with heated components 3 Disconnect plumbing at converter inlet and outlet 4 Disconnect thermocouple leads and heater connector from temperature control board 5 Loosen the four captive screws holding converter housing to floor plate Top Housing Assembly Heater Assembly Thermocouple Leads and Heater C
226. ny or all of the capillaries 1 Turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Remove the instrument cover Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Capillaries Inspection and Replacement 3 Locate the capillary holders See Figure 5 1 and Figure 7 2 Cajon Fitting Figure 5 1 Inspecting and Replacing the Capillaries 4 Remove the Cajon fitting s from the reaction chamber body using a 5 8 inch wrench being careful not to lose the ferrule or O ring 5 Remove the glass capillaries ferrule and O ring Inspect O ring for cuts or abrasion and replace as necessary 6 Check capillary for particulate deposits Clean or replace as necessary 7 Replace capillary in reaction chamber body making sure the O ring is around the capillary before inserting it into the body 8 Replace Cajon fitting Note that the Cajon fitting should be tightened slightly more than hand tight 9 Reconnect tubing to top of fittings being careful to insert ferrule and O ring properly and tighten knurled nut finger tight 10 Re install the cover Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 5 3 Preventive Maintenance Thermoelectric Cooler Fins Inspection and Cleaning Thermoelectric Cooler Fins Inspection and Cleaning A Fan Filters Inspection and Cleaning 5 4 Model 42 Instruction Manual 11 Connect the power cord and turn the instrument ON Use the following procedure to inspect and clean t
227. o Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 7 25 Servicing Analog Output Testing Analog Output Testing 7 26 Model 42 Instruction Manual Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect all the power supply electrical connections Note connector locations to facilitate re connection 3 Loosen the captive screw securing the power supply to the chassis plate and lift out the power supply Power Supply gt Retaining Screws 4 BOTTOM VIEW Captive Screw Figure 7 14 Replacing the DC Power Supply 4 Turn the power supply upside down and remove the four retaining screws securing the power supply to the power supply plate and remove the power supply 5 To install the DC power supply follow the previous steps in reverse The analog outputs should be tested if the concentration value on the front panel display disagrees with the analog outputs To check the analog outputs you connect a meter to an analog output channel voltage or current and compare the meter reading with the output value set on the Test Analog Outputs screen Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Analog Output Testing Equipment Required Multimeter Use the following procedure to test
228. o a channel and press 4 With the cursor at Calibrate Zero press e The screen displays the input voltage for the selected channel 5 Make sure that nothing is connected to the channel input pins and 8 put p press to calibrate the input voltage on the selected channel to zero volts The screen displays 0 00 V as the voltage setting 6 Press Cu gt Cm to return to the Analog Input Cal screen and repeat Steps 2 through 4 to calibrate other input channels to zero as necessary 7 Continue with the Calibrating the Input Channels to Full Scale procedure that follows Use the following procedure to calibrate the input channels to full scale by applying a known voltage to the channels Thermo Fisher Scientific Pressure Transducer Assembly Replacement A Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Pressure Transducer Assembly Replacement Equipment Required DC voltage source greater than 0 volts and less than 10 volts 1 Connect the known DC voltage source to the input channel 1 8 to be calibrated Figure 7 15 shows the analog output pins and Table 7 5 identifies the associated channels 2 From the Main Menu press _4_ to scroll to Service press gt 4 to scroll to Analog Input Calibration and press The Analog Input Cal screen displays input channels 1 8 3 At the Analog Input Cal screen press Y to scroll to the channel selected in Step 1 and press Ce 4 Press _ to scroll
229. o an automatic calibration of the input board A D stages A message will be displayed after the optimum setting has been determined Note The measurement system and the PMT are both shut off inside this screen A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Input Board Calibration gt Automatic Input Calibration e Press to leave warning screen and begin automatic calibration 3 80 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Input Frequency Display The Input Frequency Display screen is used to manually adjust the input board gain This may be used as a troubleshooting tool for the input board The gain setting and test mode are reset upon exiting this screen e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Input Board Calibration gt Input Frequency Display e Press to leave warning screen e Use Jand to toggle the test signal and bypass the PMT e Use l Jand gt to change the gain between 1 10 and 100 Temperature Calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific The Temperature calibration screen allows the user to view and set the ambient temperature sensor calibration The temperature calibration is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Temperature Calibration
230. o the analyzer 1 Assemble a dynamic calibration system such as the one shown in Figure 4 1 2 Ensure that all flow meters are calibrated under the conditions of use against a reliable standard such as a soap bubble meter or wet test meter All volumetric flow rates should be corrected to 25 C and 760 mmHg 3 Precautions should be taken to remove O and other contaminants from the NO pressure regulator and delivery system prior to the start of calibration to avoid any conversion of NO to NO Failure to do so can cause significant errors in calibration This problem can be minimized by a Carefully evacuating the regulator after the regulator has been connected to the cylinder and before opening the cylinder valve b Thoroughly flushing the regulator and delivery system with NO after opening the cylinder valve c Not removing the regulator from the cylinder between calibrations unless absolutely necessary 4 Connect the analyzer sample bulkhead input to the output of the GPT system Use the following procedure to adjust the instrument gain This includes e Setting the NO and NO background to zero e Calibrating the NO channel to the NO calibration gas e Calibrating the NO channel to the NO calibration gas The NO and NO background corrections are determined during zero calibration The background signal is the combination of electrical offsets PMT dark current and trace substances undergoing chemiluminescence
231. ocnococnoconnocoss 3 3 Table 3 2 Default Analog Outputs in Single Range Mode 3 9 Table 3 3 Default Analog Outputs in Dual Range Mode 3 10 Table 3 4 Default Analog Outputs in Auto Range Mode 3 12 Table 3 5 Standard A e o 3 14 Table 3 6 Extended Ranges ooococococoocicicccoconnnncoccnronnonocornononocornononorororornnnonos 3 15 Table 3 7 Analog Output Zero to Full Scale Table 3 49 Table 3 8 Signal Type Group ChOICES ooocicooniccinnocinonccnnocinonocnnnncnnnocnnnoos 3 51 Table 4 1 Scrubbing Materials ooocoonicnnicionicincnnincnnoncnncncnocnnnnrnrnnrncnocnnnnos 4 2 Table 6 1 Troubleshooting General Guide oocooicicniniociincincncincnninnnncnnooso 6 2 Table 6 2 Troubleshooting Alarm Messages ooocococonoocicinoncnncncnonncnrnornnnoos 6 4 Table 6 3 Motherboard Connector Pin Descripti0NS o ccooninio c 6 8 Table 6 4 Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions 6 13 Table 6 5 Front Panel Board Connector Pin Diagram o o o 6 15 Table 6 6 0 Expansion Board Optional Connector Pin Descriptions 6 17 Table 6 7 Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions 6 18 Table 6 8 Input Board Connector Pin Descriptions oooonocinicincnn 6 20 Table 6 9 Temperatur
232. ode to single Send set range mode single Receive set range mode single ok gas mode This command reports the current mode of sample zero or span The example below reports that the gas mode is sample Send gas mode Receive gas mode sample set sample set sample gas These commands set the zero span valves to the sample mode The example below sets the instrument to sample mode that is the instrument is reading the sample gas Send set sample Receive set sample ok Model 42 Instruction Manual B 33 C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration B 34 Model 42 Instruction Manual set zero set zero gas These commands set the zero span valves to the zero mode The example below sets the instrument to zero mode that is the instrument is reading the sample gas Send set zero Receive set zero ok set span set span gas These commands set the zero span valves to the span mode The example below sets the instrument to span mode that is the instrument is sampling span gas Send set span Receive set span ok gas unit This command reports the current gas units ppb ppm 1g m or mg m The example reports that the gas unit is set to ppb Send gas unit Receive gas unit ppb set gas unit unit ppb ppm g m pg m This command sets the gas units to ppb ppm 1g m or mg m The example below sets the gas units to mg m Send set gas unit mg m3 Receive set gas unit mg m3 ok
233. of the NO channel ppm 4 Record the NO our concentration and the analyzer NO response as indicated by the recorder response Calibrate the NO Channel to the Use the following procedure to calibrate the NO channel to the NO NO Calibration Gas calibration gas 1 Press Ca to return to the Calibration menu and choose Cal NOx Coefficient 4 12 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Preparing NO NO and NO Calibration Curves Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration 2 Verify that the NO calibration gas concentration is the same as the NO calibration gas concentration plus any known NO impurity The NO line of the Calibrate NO screen displays the current NO concentration The SPAN CONC line of the display is where you enter the NO calibration gas concentration Use e J to move the cursor left and right and use to increment and decrement the numeric character at the cursor Press to calculate and save the new NO coefficient based on the entered span concentration Press _ gt to return to the Run screen The exact NO concentration is calculated from Eno X INO I stp NO2 Imp NOx lour NO STD 2 JIMP Exo Fo Fp Where NO our diluted NO concentration at the output manifold ppm NO imp concentration of NO impurity in the standard NO cylinder ppm The NO recorder response will equal Recorder Response scale Where NOx lour
234. on All calibration screens operate the same way Therefore the following description of the NO calibration screen applies to the NO2 and NO calibration screens as well The display shows the current NO concentration reading and the current NO range The next line of the display is where the NO calibration gas concentration is entered It is important to note the averaging time when calibrating The longer the averaging time the more accurate the calibration will be To be most accurate use the 300 second averaging time For more information about calibration see Chapter 4 Calibration e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Cal NO NO2 or NOx Coefficient 3 22 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Calibration Menu PE AT A Fel yt Pate EH bo bet EN EEE TE Bone TOP Fane Bast ade 5 i iNi i Calibrate Pressure The Calibrate Pressure screen is used to set the calibration pressure The Calibration pressure should be set only when calibrating the instrument e In the Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibrate Pressure Zero Span Check The Zero Span Check menu is available with the zero span valve option when in NO or NO measurement modes It is used to program the instrument to perform fully automated zero and span checks or adjustments Total Duration Hour is the sum of zero span and purge duration minutes Zero and Span Calibration Reset are toggle items that change bet
235. on oven option is installed Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 59 Operation Diagnostics Menu The internal temperature is the air temperature measured by a sensor located on the interface board e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Temperatures Pressure The Pressure screen read only displays the reaction chamber pressure The pressure is measured by a pressure transducer at the reaction chamber e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Pressure PME ieee EE i Flow The Flow screen read only displays the sample and ozonator flow rate The flows are measured by internal flow sensors e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Flow 3 60 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu Analog Input Readings The Analog Input Readings screen read only displays the 8 current user scaled analog readings if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Analog Input Readings Analog Input Voltages The Analog Input Voltages screen read only displays the 8 raw analog voltage readings if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Analog Input Voltages Digital Inputs The Digital Inputs screen read only displays the state of the 16 digital inputs e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Digital Inputs Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42
236. onnector Bottom Housing Assembly Captive Screws 4 gt Figure 7 10 NO to NO Molybdenum Converter Assembly Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 7 19 Servicing Solenoid Valve Replacement 7 20 Solenoid Valve Replacement Model 42 Instruction Manual 6 Remove the six screws holding the top housing assembly to the bottom half 7 Remove the converter cartridge heater assembly from the bottom housing assembly 8 Loosen the heater clamp pry heater apart no wider than necessary and remove the converter cartridge noting the proper orientation of heater wires and thermocouple probe 9 To replace converter follow previous steps in reverse Note Be sure to wrap the O converter tube snugly around the heater Use the following procedure to replace the solenoid valve Figure 7 1 1 Equipment Required Solenoid valve Wrench 5 16 inch Philips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Refer to Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter to lower the partition panel then proceed to the next step below 2 Disconnect solenoid from the Measurement Interface board NO NO connector Note electrical connections to facilitate re connection 3 Remove plumbing from solenoid Note plum
237. ons Configuration iria B 39 We Contento ette Delano sao Lea a LS B 42 Record Layout DI i B 47 Format Specifier for ASCI Responses cuca B 48 Format Specifier for Binary Responses cccjnesesdvueiniavaronisevessuaderaveass B 48 Format Specifier for EREC Layout sssssssesssseseseserererererersrsesesreres B 49 A E EA E E B 49 Value String nai aso aR N a a B 49 Valge Sources anorani e an E ERAN B 49 Alarm Informations A a O A B 50 Translation Table seron Aa B 50 Selection Tabler Ri B 50 Button Desastres B 50 A a E E E A S B 51 Appendix C MODBUS Protocol sicario C 1 Serial Communication Parameters and C 1 TCP Communication Parameters outils C 2 Application Data Unit Definition ia C 2 a A aaa hadares C 2 MBAD Header rada C 2 F nction Cr A seso C 3 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual xiii Contents Dita tanatorios C 3 PPPOt CECE acute Necamanae A O A C 3 PU MEMO MNOS rada an C 3 0x01 0x02 Read Coils Read Inputsiiinin iia C 3 0x03 0x04 Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers C 5 0x05 Force Write Single Colin inca iain tas edesies vaneessaseonsacvets C 7 MODBUS Parameters Supported rt as tia C 8 Appendix D Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protoco ooonmmmo D 1 Serial Communication Parameters cc cccsssessssecssscecssseecssseeesseees D 1 TCP Communication Parameters occoononononannnononnonannnnonacnnononannanononos D 2 A denen D 2 Abbreviations Used standard D 2 Basic Comma
238. ontrol of the listed instrument functions e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls The Ozonator screen is used to turn the internal ozonator on or off The display shows the status of the control line that turns the ozonator on or off The next line of the display shows the user specified ozonator setting Under most conditions the control line status and ozonator set status are the same However as a safety precaution the microprocessor can override the user specified ozonator setting This occurs only if the ozonator flow Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu doesn t indicate any flow or if the NO converter temperature is below the minimum alarm limit In this case an alarm is activated and the ozonator is turned off This is done to prevent the ozonator from overheating which will result in permanent damage to the ozonator or if the converter temperature drops below the minimum limit which reduces the effectiveness of the ozone destruct It is possible however to override the ozonator shut off due to converter temperature being out of range by setting the ozonator safety OFF in the Service Mode Note The ozonator must be ON to obtain NO NO and NO readings As an additional safety precaution a lit LED mounted on the measurement interface board indicates that the ozonator is on A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Ozonator PMT Supply The PMT Su
239. ormed into NO before it can be measured using the chemiluminescent reaction NO is converted to NO by a molybdenum NO gt to NO converter heated to about 325 C the optional stainless steel converter is heated to 625 C The ambient air sample is drawn into the Model 427 through the sample bulkhead as shown in Figure 1 1 The sample flows through a capillary and then to the mode solenoid valve The solenoid valve routes the sample either straight to the reaction chamber NO mode or through the NO gt to NO converter and then to the reaction chamber NO mode A flow sensor to the reaction chamber measures the sample flow Dry air enters the Model 427 through the dry air bulkhead passes through a flow switch and then through a silent discharge ozonator The ozonator generates the ozone needed for the chemiluminescent reaction At the reaction chamber the ozone reacts with the NO in the sample to produce excited NO molecules A photomultiplier tube PMT housed in a thermoelectric cooler detects the luminescence generated during this reaction From the reaction chamber the exhaust travels through the ozone O3 converter to the pump and is released through the vent The NO and NO concentrations calculated in the NO and NO modes are stored in memory The difference between the concentrations is used to calculate the NO concentration The Model 427 outputs NO NOs and NO concentrations to the front panel display the analog outputs
240. ose Item Signal Concentrations Other Measurements Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu The Choose Signal screen displays a submenu of the analog output signal 8 pray 8 Output sig group choices Group choices are Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board is installed e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Item 1 8 The Concentrations screen allows the user to select the output signal that is tied to the selected streaming data item The selected item is shown by lt after it In dual or auto range mode HI or LO is displayed to indicate high or low concentrations Range NO is visible only in auto range mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Select Item gt Concentrations The Other Measurements screen allows the user to select the output signal that is tied to the selected streaming data item The selected item is shown by lt after it Items displayed are determined by the options installed e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Select Item gt Other Measurements Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 39 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Analog Inputs RS 232 RS 485 Selection 3 40 Model 42 Instruction Manual
241. ouple TC SS TEMP J6 1 SS Temperature Range Jumper A 2 SS Temperature Range Jumper B Service Locations 1 866 282 0430 Toll Free 1 508 520 0430 International For additional assistance service is available from exclusive distributors worldwide Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com aqi Model 42 Instruction Manual 6 21 Chapter 7 Servicing This chapter explains how to replace the Model 427 subassemblies It assumes that a subassembly has been identified as defective and needs to be replaced For fault location information refer to the Preventive Maintenance chapter and the Troubleshooting chapter in this manual The service mode in the Operation chapter also includes parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing problems For additional service assistance see Service Locations at the end of this chapter This chapter includes the following parts information and component replacement procedures Safety Precautions on page 7 2 Firmware Updates on page 7 4 Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 Replacement Parts List on page 7 4 Cable List on page 7 6 External Device Connection Components on page 7 6 Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel on page 7 8 Pump Replacement on page 7 9 Fan Replacement
242. ousing heater replaceable cartridge and a type K thermocouple sensor Mode Solenoid The mode solenoid valve switches analyzer operation between the NO mode and NO mode It routes the ambient air sample either through the reaction chamber NO mode or through the NO2 to NO converter and then to the reaction chamber NO mode Reaction Chamber The reaction chamber is where the sample reacts with ozone and produces excited NO that gives off a photon of energy when it decays The reaction chamber is heated and controlled to approximately 50 C in order to ensure the greatest instrument stability The sample and ozone flow capillaries and a thermistor sensor are also housed in on the reaction chamber assembly 8 2 Model 427 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Optical Filter Pressure Transducer Sample Flow Sensor Ozonator Ozonator Flow Switch Photomultiplier Tube Photomultiplier Tube Cooler Pump Sample Capillary Thermo Fisher Scientific System Description Ozonator The optical filter housed in the reaction chamber limits the spectral region viewed by the detector and eliminates possible interferences due to other chemiluminescent reactions The pressure transducer measures the reaction chamber pressure The sample flow sensor located at the reaction chamber inlet measures the sample flow into the reaction chamber The Ozonator generates the necessary ozone concentration required for the chemilumine
243. ove the cover 2 Disconnect the tubing from the pressure transducer and connect a vacuum pump known to produce a vacuum less than 1 mm Hg 3 From the Main Menu press to scroll to Service gt press gt to scroll to Pressure Calibration gt and press The Pressure Sensor Cal menu appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 4 At the Pressure Sensor Cal menu press to select Zero The Calibrate Pressure Zero screen appears 5 Wait at least 10 seconds for the zero reading to stabilize then press to save the zero pressure value Model 42 Instruction Manual 7 33 Servicing Temperature Control Board Replacement Temperature Control Board Replacement 7 34 Model 42 Instruction Manual 6 Disconnect the pump from the pressure transducer 7 Press _W_ to return to the Pressure Sensor Cal menu 8 At the Pressure Sensor Cal menu press Cs Je to select Span The Calibrate Pressure Span screen appears 9 Wait at least 10 seconds for the ambient reading to stabilize use e Jandi f J to enter the known barometric pressure and press to save the pressure value 10 Reconnect the instrument tubing to the pressure transducer 11 Install the cover Use the following procedure to replace the temperature control board Figure 7 6 Equipment Required Temperature control boar
244. over 2 Unplug the I O expansion board cable from the EXPANSION BD connector on the motherboard Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 7 37 Servicing 1 0 Expansion Board Optional Replacement 3 Remove the two standoffs holding the 1 O expansion board connector to the rear panel Figure 7 19 4 Pop off the board from the mounting studs and remove the board 5 To install the I O expansion board follow previous steps in reverse 6 Calibrate the analog current outputs and analog voltage inputs as defined earlier in this chapter Motherboard Digital Output Board 1 0 Expansion Board Opt 1 0 Expansion Board Motherboard Digital Output Board Figure 7 19 Rear Panel Board Connectors 7 38 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Digital Output Board Replacement A Motherboard Replacement A Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Digital Output Board Replacement Use the following procedure to replace the digital output board Figure 7 18 Equipment Required Digital output board Nut driver 3 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the I O expansion board optional if used See the I O Expansion Board Optional Repla
245. ozonf 0 000 pmtv 116 11 04 02 22 03 flags 54089100 no 8421E 1 nox 8457E 1 lono 6477E 1 lonox 6505E 1 pres 131 5 pmtt 53 1 intt 80 0 rctt 80 0 convt 61 smplf 0 500 ozonf 0 000 pmtv 116 11 05 02 22 03 flags 54089100 no 8440E 1 nox 8456E 1 lono 6492E 1 lonox 6505E 1 pres 131 5 pmtt 53 2 intt 80 0 rctt 80 0 convt 61 smplf 0 500 ozonf 0 000 pmtv 116 11 06 02 22 03 flags 54089100 no 8432E 1 nox 8483E 1 lono 6486E 1 lonox 6525E 1 pres 133 0 pmtt 53 0 intt 80 0 rctt 80 0 convt 61 smplf 0 500 ozonf 0 000 pmtv 116 11 07 02 22 03 flags 54089100 no 8442E 1 nox 8383E 1 lono 6494E 1 lonox 6449E 1 pres 131 5 pmtt 53 1 intt 80 0 rctt 80 0 convt 61 smplf 0 500 ozonf 0 000 pmtv 116 where pmtv PMT Voltage pmtt PMT Temperature intt Internal Temperature rctt Reaction Chamber Temperature convt NO Converter Temperature smplf Sample Flow ozonf Ozonator Flow pres Pressure erec format lrec format srec format These commands report the output format for long and short records and dynamic data in various formats such as ASCII without text ASCII with text or binary The example below shows the output format for long records is ASCII with text according to Table B 4 Send lrec format Receive lrec format 01 set erec format format set lrec format format set srec format format Model 42 Instruction Manual B 21 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging B 22 Model 42 Instruction Manual These commands set t
246. p and startup the analyzer Chapter 3 Operation describes the front panel display the front panel pushbuttons and the menu driven software Chapter 4 Calibration provides the procedures for calibrating the analyzer and describes the required equipment Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance provides maintenance procedures to ensure reliable and consistent instrument operation Chapter 6 Troubleshooting presents guidelines for diagnosing analyzer failures isolating faults and includes recommended actions for restoring proper operation Chapter 7 Servicing presents safety alerts for technicians working on the analyzer step by step instructions for repairing and replacing components and a replacement parts list It also includes contact information for product support and technical information Chapter 8 System Description describes the function and location of the system components provides an overview of the software structure and includes a description of the system electronics and input output connections Chapter 9 Optional Equipment describes the optional equipment that can be used with this analyzer Appendix A Warranty is a copy of the warranty statement Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands provides a description of the C Link protocol commands that can be used to remotely control an analyzer using a host device such as a PC or datalogger Model 42 Instruction Manual i
247. ponse again interpreted as a string A button appears on this line which when pressed pops up an input dialog which will state Please enter a new value for NO using a d ddd format The string entered by the user is used to construct the output command If the user enters for example 1 234 the constructed command will be set no coef 1 234 NO 21f Code_ O Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Code 4 Code 5 Code 6 Code_7 Code_8 Code_9 Code_10 Code 11 Lset range no d n This is a line which appears slightly indented the title is again NO and the value the twenty first element of the data response interpreted as a floating point number There is a no translation button which creates a selection list of twelve Code nn options The number of the user selection is used to create the output command Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual B 51 C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition B 52 Model 42 Instruction Manual Mode 6 12 13x local remote service service 0 1 Tset mode s n This is a line which has a title of Mode and value taken from the sixth field of the data response There is a bitfield extraction of bits 12 through 13 from the source the value type is not important here because the value is being translated to an output string Once the bits have been extracted they are shifted down to the bit zero position Thus the possible values of this example will be 0 through 3 The translation list shows the
248. pops up a selection list without any translation The output value is number of the selected option T Indicates a button which pops up a selection list with output translation The number of the option selected is used as an index into the translation table to generate an output string N Indicates a button which only sends the subsequent command to the instrument No user prompting happens The following string through an optional or the end of the line is the command which is to be sent to the instrument upon the completion of the button selection The command string should normally contain print style formatting to include the user input Ifa is present it indicates a Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition command which is sent to the instrument upon successful completion of the button command to update the value field This is not currently used Examples Some examples n is the C syntax for an end of line character Concentrations n This is a single text only line An This is a single blank line NO 3s n This is a line which appears slightly indented The text field is NO the value is taken from the third element of the data response and interpreted as a string NO 18sBd ddd set no coef s n This is a line which also appears slightly indented The next field is also NO but the value is taken from the eighteenth element of the data res
249. pply screen is used to turn the PMT power supply on or off This is useful in a troubleshooting situation e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt PMT Supply Auto Manual Mode The Auto Manual Mode screen allows selection of the automatic mode NO NO NO mode manual NO or NO mode manual NO The auto cycle mode switches the mode solenoid valve automatically on a 10 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 27 Operation Instrument Controls Menu second cycle so that NO NO and NO concentrations are determined The manual NO mode puts the mode solenoid valve into the open position so that the sample gas bypasses the NO2 to NO converter Therefore only the NO concentration is determined The manual NOx mode puts the mode solenoid valve into the closed position so that the sample gas passes through the NO gt to NO converter Therefore only the NO concentration is determined In the manual modes additional averaging times of 1 2 and 5 seconds are available from the Averaging Times screen e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Auto Manual Mode Datalogging Settings The Datalogging Settings menu deals with datalogging e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings E Mihei i Select SREC LREC The Select SREC LREC is used to select short record or long record format for other operations in this menu e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Contro
250. r fuse is blown replace both fuses 4 Insert fuse drawer and reconnect power cord Scrubber Use the following procedure to replace the ammonia scrubber Figure 7 Replacement Equipment Required Ammonia scrubber Nut driver 3 16 inch f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Unscrew the Teflon tubing at both ends of the scrubber 3 Pull the scrubber off the mounting clips 7 36 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing 1 0 Expansion Board Optional Replacement 4 Push the replacement scrubber into the mounting clips 5 Attach the Teflon tubing at both ends of the scrubber 6 Replace the cover Mounting Clips lt Ammonia Scrubber Figure 7 17 Replacing the Scrubber 1 0 Expansion Board Use the following procedure to replace the optional 1 O expansion board Optional Figure 7 18 Replacement Foupmer Required I O expansion board Nut driver 3 16 inch f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the c
251. r to the Pressure Transducer Calibration procedure that follows Pressure Transducer Use the following procedure to calibrate the pressure transducer Calibration Equipment Required Vacuum pump WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives 4 7 32 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Pressure Transducer Calibration If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Note An error in the zero setting of the pressure transducer does not introduce a measurable error in the output concentration reading Therefore if only a barometer is available and not a vacuum pump only adjust the span setting A A rough check of the pressure accuracy can be made by obtaining the current barometric pressure from the local weather station or airport and comparing it to the pressure reading However since these pressures are usually corrected to sea level it may be necessary to correct the reading to local pressure by subtracting 0 027 mmHg per foot of altitude A Do not try to calibrate the pressure transducer unless the pressure is known accurately A 1 Rem
252. ration Status is 03 Error Status is 04 Data Query String lt STX gt DA lt CR gt Reply String lt STX gt MDO3 lt SP gt 001 lt SP gt 2578 01 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP gt 0000000000 lt SP gt 002 lt SP gt t T 1 Address First Concentration E format 25 78 Address 1 5681 00 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP gt 0000000000 lt SP gt 003 lt SP gt 1175 01 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP T 1 t Second Concentration 5 681 Address 2 Third Concentration 11 75 0000000000 lt SP gt lt CR gt The attached concentrations are in the selected gas units The measurements that are attached to the response if not valid in a particular mode then a value of 0 0 will be reported The following measurements reported in response to DA command are for the Model 422 The 3 measurements reported in single range mode include e NO e NO e NO The 6 measurements reported in dual or auto range modes include e low NO e low NO e low NO e high NO e high NO e high NO See Table D 1 for operating status and Table D 2 for error status for the Model 422 Thermo Fisher Scientific Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol Geysitech Commands Table D 1 Operating Status for Model 42i D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO gt Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 gt Hex value 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 MSB LSB Operating status Service Mode On 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 l1 Maintenance Local 0 10 0 10 0 10 1 0 Zero
253. rd Pin Descriptions Detail B Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description 1 Analog1 13 Power_Fail_NC 2 Analog ground 14 Power_Fail_COM 3 Analog2 15 Power_Fail_NO 4 Analog ground 16 TTL_Input1 5 Analog3 17 TTL_Input2 6 Analog ground 18 TTL_Input3 7 Analog4 19 TTL_Input4 8 Analog ground 20 Digital ground 9 Analog5 21 TTL_Input 10 Analog ground 22 TTL_Input6 11 Analog6 23 TTL_Input7 12 Analog ground 24 Digital ground Thermo Fisher Scientific D O Terminal Board Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Connecting External Devices identifies the connector pins and associated signals See Detail A d Assembled Connector See Detail B Detail A Figure 2 6 D O Terminal Board Views Table 2 2 D O Terminal Board Pin Descriptions Figure 2 6 shows the recommended method for attaching the cable to the terminal board using the included tie down and spacer Table 2 2 Detail B Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description 1 Relay1_ContactA 13 Relay7_ContactA 2 Relay1_ContactB 14 Relay7_ContactB 3 Relay2_ContactA 15 Relay8_ContactA 4 Relay2_ContactB 16 Relay8_ContactB 5 Relay3_ContactA 17 Relay9_ContactA 6 Relay3_ContactB 18 Relay9_ContactB 7 Relay4_ContactA 19 Relay10_ContactA 8 Relay4_ContactB 20 Relay10_ContactB 9 Relay5_ContactA 21 not used 10 Relay5_ContactB 22 24V 11 Relay6_ContactA 23 not
254. re 9 3 Flow Diagram Lag Volume Lag Volume Test Use the following procedure to test the Model 42 with lag volume option 1 Set the NO range to 1 000 ppb and the averaging time to 10 seconds 2 Introduce approximately 800 ppb NO into the Model 427 Wait for a stable reading and then record the NO reading Next introduce zero air into the Model 427 Wait until the instrument reads close to zero lt 3 ppb Repeat the above procedure two more times Take the average of the three NO readings The average NO reading should be less than 50 ppb Ammonia Scrubber The ammonia scrubber is mounted internally and removes ammonia from the sample air Teflon Particulate A 5 10 micron pore size two inch diameter Teflon element is available for Filter the Model 423 This filter should be installed just prior to the SAMPLE bulkhead When using a filter all calibrations and span checks must be performed through the filter 9 12 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Ozone Particulate Filter NO to NO Converter I O Expansion Board Assembly Terminal Block and Thermo Fisher Scientific Cable Kits Cables Optional Equipment Ozone Particulate Filter The ozone particulate filter minimizes the potential for contamination of the ozonator by trapping any particulate matter before passing through the ozonator The Model 427 includes a Molybdenum NO to NO converter as standard equipment A stainless steel conver
255. re Datalogging 3 34 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Logging Period Min Memory Allocation Thermo Fisher Scientific Percent Data Treatment Operation Instrument Controls Menu The Logging Period Min screen is used to select the logging period in minutes for the record format srec or Irec List of choices include off 1 5 15 30 and 60 minutes default e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging gt Logging Period Min The Memory Allocation Percent screen is used to select the percentage of each record type for both short records and long records Percentages between 0 and 100 are available in increments of 10 Changing this value results in log erasure for both short records and long records e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging gt Memory Allocation The Data Treatment screen is used to select the data type for the selected record type whether the data should be averaged over the interval the minimum or maximum measured during the interval or the current value last value measured Data treatment doesn t apply to all data just to the concentration measurement All other data points log the current value at the end of the interval e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging gt Data Treatment Model 4
256. re proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt Select Field gt Analog Inputs Wi hie Pin Pit Commit Content The Commit Content screen is used to save the selected output signal that is tied to the selected field item If no changes have been made NO CHANGES TO RECORD LIST will appear For more information about selecting the analog output signal group choices see Select Content above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Commit Content Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 33 Operation Instrument Controls Menu 8 Py ESTE ee naic myi ie EH mod MAMA Reset to Default Content The Reset to Default Content screen is used to reset all of the datalogging field items to default values For more information about selecting the analog output signal group choices see Select Content above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Reset to Default Content DH iid MAMA Configure Datalogging The Configure Datalogging menu deals with datalogging configuration for the currently selected record type e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configu
257. reen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Chamber Temp Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 65 Operation Alarms Menu ip priori PIL Min and Max Chamber The Minimum Chamber Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change Temperature Limits the minimum chamber temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum chamber temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Chamber Temp gt Min or Max Cooler Temperature The Cooler Temperature screen displays the current cooler temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 40 to 10 C If the cooler temperature reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated The word ALARM appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Cooler Temp amg PME TY aad i 3 66 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu Min and Max Cooler The Minimum Cooler Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change Temperature Limits the minimum cooler temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum cooler temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Cooler Temp gt Min or Max Converter Temperature The Converter Temperature screen displays the current converter temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits A
258. res res This command calibrates the permeation gas temperature sensor offset using a calibrating resistor of value res in ohms Send set cal perm gas offset res 5000 Receive set cal perm gas offset res 5000 ok set cal perm gas offset temp temp This command calibrates the permeation gas temperature sensor offset to a temperature of temp in degrees C Thermo Fisher Scientific Keys Display Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Keys Display Send set cal perm gas offset temp 34 5 Receive set cal perm gas offset temp 34 5 ok set cal perm oven offset res res This command calibrates the permeation oven temperature sensor offset using a calibrating resistor of value res in ohms Send set cal perm oven offset res 5000 Receive set cal perm oven offset res 5000 ok set cal pres This command automatically sets the current pressure as the calibration pressure The example below successfully sets the calibration pressure Send set cal pres Receive set cal pres ok push button do down en enter he help le left me menu ri right ru run button do down en enter he help le left me menu ri right ru run up 1 2 3 4 These commands simulate pressing the front panel pushbuttons The numbers represent the front panel soft keys from left to right Send push enter Receive push enter ok isc iscreen Model 42 Instruction Manual B 29 C Link Protocol Commands
259. rming up and performing self checks After the warm up period the Run screen is automatically displayed The Run screen is the normal operating screen It displays the NO NO and NO concentrations depending on operating mode From the Run screen the Main Menu can be displayed by pressing mu The Main Menu contains a list of submenus Each submenu contains related instrument settings This chapter describes each submenu and screen in detail Refer to the appropriate sections for more information Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Software Overview snas Pg dxa O I synejeg 189 1SN 1osoy snes pa ul INSS ld e NSS ld e ici aia ia E ES joo ON a JUO buey ony 10 ENG 104 9Uu09 ON 4209 ON 07 189 3909 ON 07 synejaq 49Sf a101s9y 2u09 ON J909 ON 07 189 3909 ON 07 sefuey wojsng 19S 1591 axl Aejdsiq DUO ON 1909 ON H 189 3909 ON H abuey ON 07 oney uonniia leoojny ueds ju j9ejuoy 3909 ON IH 189 3909 ON IH a6uey ON IH sebuey papu e901my 019Z 6yuoy jusuna suj au eyeg 3909 ON H 18D 3909 ON H abuey ON 07 Majes J0Jeuozo x99y9 UES sindino Bojeuy 1591 apoyw 391195 Byg ON 189 Bxa oN abuey ON IH 1e9 ndu Sojeuy yOOYD 019Z sayeis Aejoy ysbu U0D uas 5x9 ON I29 5xg ON uey ON 07 1e9 indino Bojeuy MO JOJBUOZO sinduj eu6ig UOpesuaduioo sold au Bay 07 aBuey ON H 1e9 dway MO
260. rmo Fisher Scientific Servicing Reaction Chamber Cleaning or Removal Reaction Chamber Use the following procedure to clean or remove the reaction chamber see Cleaning or Removal 8 gt Equipment Required Allen Wrench 9 64 inch Wrench 7 16 inch Wrench 9 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Remove PMT cooler as described in PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber Assembly Replacement in this chapter 2 Disconnect all plumbing connections from the reaction chamber 3 Remove the three socket head screws fastening front of reaction chamber to rear Figure 7 9 This exposes the inner surfaces of both sections of the reaction chamber and the quartz window To clean these surfaces use cotton swabs and methanol 4 To continue removing rear of reaction chamber remove the three socket head screws holding it to cooler being careful to keep quartz window and red filter in cooler body 5 To reinstall reaction chamber follow previous steps in reverse making sure to backfill the cooler with dry air or nitrogen prior to installing reaction chamber 6 Re install the measurement bench Refer to Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 7 17 Servicing NO2 to NO Co
261. rnal Accessory Connector 8 12 Model 42 Instruction Manual Table 8 1 RS 232 DB Connector Pin Configurations DB9 Pin Function 2 RX 3 TX 7 RTS 8 CTS 5 Ground The instrument uses a four wire RS 485 configuration with automatic flow control SD Refer to Table 8 2 for the DB9 connector pin configuration Table 8 2 RS 485 DB Connector Pin Configuration DB9 Pin Function 2 receive 8 receive 7 transmit 3 transmit 5 ground An RJ45 connector is used for the 10Mbs Ethernet connection supporting TCP IP communications via standard IPV4 addressing The IP address may be configured for static addressing or dynamic addressing set using a DHCP server Any serial port protocols may be accessed over Ethernet in addition to the serial port The external accessory connector is not used in the Model 427 analyzer This port is used in other models to communicate with smart external devices that may be mounted hundreds of feet from the analyzer using an RS 485 electrical interface Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 9 Optional Equipment The Model 42 is available with the following options e Internal Zero Span and Sample Valves on page 9 1 e Internal Permeation Span Source on page 9 2 e Ozonator Permeation Dryer on page 9 10 e Sample Permeation Dryer on page 9 10 e Lag Volume on page 9 10 e Ammonia Scrubber on page 9 12 e Teflon Particulate Filter on page
262. rts the status of the PMT on or off The example below reports that the PMT is on Send pmt status Receive pmt status on set pmt onoff These commands set the PMT on or off The example below turns the PMT off Send set pmt off Receive set pmt off ok save set save params This command stores all current parameters in FLASH memory It is important that each time instrument parameters are changed that this command be sent If changes are not saved they will be lost in the event of a power failure The example below saves the parameters to FLASH memory Send set save params Receive set save params ok time This command reports the current time 24 hour time The example below reports that the internal time is 2 15 30 pm Send time Receive time 14 15 30 set time hh mm ss hh hours mm minutes ss seconds This command sets the internal clock 24 hour time The example below sets the internal time to 2 15 pm Thermo Fisher Scientific Communications Configuration Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration Note If seconds are omitted the seconds default to 00 A Send set time 14 15 Receive set time 14 15 ok addr dns This command reports the TCP IP address for the domain name server Send addr dns Receive addr dns 192 168 1 1 set addr dns address This command sets the dns address where address consists of four numbers gt ranging from 0 25
263. ry air line The processor software tasks are organized into four areas e Instrument Control e Monitoring Signals e Measurement Calculations e Output Communication Low level embedded processors are used to control the various functions on the boards such as analog and digital I O and heater control These processors are controlled over a serial interface with a single high level processor that also controls the front panel user interface The low level processors all run a common piece of firmware that is bundled with the high level firmware and loaded on power up if a different version is detected Each board has a specific address that is used to identify to the firmware what functions are supported on that board This address is also used for the communications between the low level processors and the high level processor Every tenth of a second the frequency counters analog I O and digital I O are read and written to by the low level processor The counters are accumulated over the past second and the analog inputs are averaged over that second The high level processor polls the low level processors once per second to exchange the measurement and control data Signals are gathered from the low level processors once per second and then processed by the high level processor to produce the final measurement values The one second accumulated counts representing the NO NO are accumulated and reported for the user specified avera
264. s in reverse 6 Re install the measurement bench Refer to Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter Use the following procedure to replace the input board Figure 7 13 Equipment Required Input board Philips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Model 42 Instruction Manual 7 23 Servicing Input Board Replacement 7 24 Model 42 Instruction Manual 1 Refer to Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter to lower the partition panel then proceed to the next step below 2 Disconnect the coaxial cable with BNC connector and the ribbon cable 3 Loosen the two screws holding the assembly bracket to the floor plate move the assembly towards the rear and lift the assembly off the screws 4 Loosen the two screws holding the input box to the assembly bracket and lift the input box off the screws Asse bly Bracket SS Q Input Box Assembly Bracket Screws 2 Figure 7 13 Replacing the Input Board 5 Remove the four screws holding the input board to the input box and remove the input board 6 Install the input board by following the previous steps in reverse 7 Re install the measurement bench Refer to Removing the Measurement Bench and
265. scent reaction The ozone reacts with the NO in the ambient air sample to produce the electronically excited NO molecules The ozonator flow switch located at the ozonator inlet completes an electrical safety circuit when air flows through the sensor to the ozonator If airflow stops the flow sensor breaks the electrical circuit to the ozonator and shuts it off to prevent the ozonator from overheating The Photomultiplier tube PMT provides the infrared sensitivity required to detect the NO luminescence resulting from the reaction of the ozone with the ambient air sample Optical energy from the reaction is converted to an electrical signal by the PMT and sent to the input board that transmits it to the processor The thermoelectric PMT cooler reduces the PMT temperature to approximately 3 C to minimize dark current and increase instrument sensitivity The cooler helps to increase zero and span stability over a wide ambient temperature range The cooler housing also shields the PMT from external electrical and optical interferences The vacuum pump draws the reacted gasses out of the reaction chamber The sample capillary along with the pump is used to control flow in the sample line Model 42 Instruction Manual 8 3 System Description Software Dry Air Capillary Software Instrument Control Monitoring Signals 8 4 Model 427 Instruction Manual The dry air capillary along with the pump is used to control flow in the d
266. set the NO background to zero e Record the stable zero air responses as Zuo Znox and Zno2 recorder response percent scale Adjust the NO flow from the standard NO cylinder to generate a NO concentration of about 80 of the upper range limit URL of the NO range The exact NO concentration is calculated from Fno X NOstp INO lour oe Fno Fo Fp Where NO our Diluted NO concentration at the output manifold ppm NOsrp No feed concentration Model 42 Instruction Manual 4 11 Calibration Calibration Fxo No flow Fo Ozone flow Fp Dilution flow Calibrate the NO Channel to the Use the following procedure to calibrate the NO channel to the NO NO Calibration Gas calibration gas 1 Allow the analyzer to sample the NO calibration gas until the NO NO2 and NOx readings have stabilized 2 When the responses stabilize from the Main Menu choose Calibration gt Cal NO Coefficient The NO line of the Calibrate NO screen displays the current NO concentration The SPAN CONC line of the display is where you enter the NO calibration gas concentration Use e to move the cursor left and right and use Ce Js to increment and decrement the numeric character at the cursor 3 Press to calculate and save the new NO coefficient based on the entered span concentration The NO recorder response will equal NO Recorder Response scale Sils x 100 Zno Where URL Nominal upper range limit
267. sired set point Protective circuitry prevents over heating in the event of broken wires to the thermocouple or processor faults The PMT power supply produces high voltage to operate the photo multiplier tube used in the measurement system The output voltage is adjustable from approximately 600 to 1200 volts under software control The input board accepts the current signal from the PMT and converts it to a voltage which is scaled by a factor of approximately 1 10 or 100 depending on the full scale range of the NO channel The scaled voltage signal is converted to a frequency and sent to the microprocessor The input board includes a test signal that can be activated under software control The test signal is injected at the first stage of the input board in parallel with the PMT input This allows the input board and the connection to the processor system to be tested and calibrated without using the PMT The digital output board connects to the motherboard and provides solenoid driver outputs and relay contact outputs to a connector located on the rear panel of the instrument Ten relay contacts normally open with power off are provided which are electrically isolated from each other Eight solenoid driver outputs open collector are provided along with a corresponding 24VDC supply pin on the connector The I O expansion board connects to the motherboard and adds the capability to input external analog voltage inputs and to output a
268. space can be present after the lt address gt If the received command does not satisfy the above formats or if the lt address gt does not match the Instrument Address the command is ignored This is a sample command to switch the instrument to zero mode instrument id 5 lt STX gt STOO5 lt SP gt N lt CR gt Data Sampling Data This command DA initiates a data transfer from the instrument The Query Command instrument responds with measurement data which depends on the range DA mode and is listed in Measurements reported in response to DA command below The command structure for a data query command is as follows lt STX gt DA lt address gt lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The lt address gt is optional which means it can be left out completely The lt address gt if present must match the Instrument Address Additional space can be present after the lt address gt If the lt address gt is left out then no space is allowed in the query string A command with no address is also a valid command The following are the different acceptable formats of the DA command with Instrument Address 5 lt STX gt DA lt CR gt lt STX gt DA005 lt CR gt lt STX gt DA lt SP gt lt SP gt 5 lt ETX gt lt BCC gt lt STX gt DA lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The data query string is valid and will be answered with data transmission only if the command starts with lt STX gt which is followed by the characters DA and the lt address gt if present m
269. srec string string cur avg min max These commands set the data treatment to current average minimum or maximum for the concentration values recorded in the long records lrecs or short records srecs The example below sets the data treatment for concentrations in lrec to minimum Send set data treatment lrec min Receive set data treatment lrec min ok list din list dout These commands report the current selection for the digital outputs in the format Output no Index number variable name active state The active state for digital outputs is open or closed The active state for digital inputs is high or low Send list dout Receive list dout output index variable state 1 35 CONC ALARM open 3 4 UNITS open 4 11 GEN ALARM closed 7 7 NO MODE open 8 8 NOX MODE open list lrec list srec list stream list sp Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging These commands report the list of current selections for long record logging data short record logging data streaming data output or the scratch pad sp list The example below shows the list for streaming data output Send list stream Receive list stream field index variable x x time 1 1 no 2 2 no2 3 3 nox 4 18 intt 5 25 pres 6 26 smplf er xy Ir xy st xy x 0 1 Reply termination format see set format format command y 0 1 2 Output format see set erec lrec srec format format command These comma
270. ssure It may be necessary to use an atmospheric bypass plumbing arrangement as shown in Figure 2 4 if gas pressure is greater than atmospheric pressure A Model 42 Instruction Manual 2 3 Installation Setup Procedure Vent to Exhaust Line at Instrument Bulkhead Atmospheric Pressure w A Ss Input Gas Line Figure 2 4 Atmospheric Dump Bypass Plumbing 2 Connect the air dryer to the DRY AIR bulkhead 3 Connect the EXHAUST bulkhead to a suitable vent or ozone scrubber The exhaust line should be 1 4 inch OD with a minimum ID of 1 8 inch The length of the exhaust line should be less than 10 feet Verify that there is no restriction in this line 4 Connect a suitable recording device to the rear panel connector For detailed information about connecting to the instrument refer to Connecting External Devices on page 2 5 External Device Connection Components on page 7 6 Terminal Block and Cable Kits on page 9 13 Instrument Controls Menu on page 3 26 For detailed information about troubleshooting a connection refer to Analog Output Testing on page 7 26 5 Plug the instrument into an outlet of the appropriate voltage and frequency Under no circumstances should this grounding system be defeated A 1 WARNING The Model 42i is supplied with a three wire grounding cord 2 4 Model 42i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Connecting External Devices
271. st recording the value so that after any troubleshooting procedure is completed the initial value can be re entered thereby not altering the multipoint calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific Zero and Span Check Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Zero and Span Check The analyzer requires initial and periodic calibration according to the procedures outlined in this manual Initially the frequency of the calibration procedure should be determined by the stability of the zero and span checks which may be run daily You should generate a new calibration curve when zero and span checks indicate a shift in instrument gain of more than 10 percent from that determined during the most recent multipoint calibration You can adjust the frequency of calibration and even zero and span checks appropriately as you gain confidence with the instrument You should have a quality control plan where the frequency and the number of points required for calibration can be modified on the basis of calibration and zero and span check data collected over a period of time Note however that the EPA requires a minimum of one multipoint calibration per calendar quarter Such a quality control program is essential to ascertain the accuracy and reliability of the air quality data collected and to alert the user if the accuracy or reliability of the data should become unacceptable A compilation of this kind might include items such as dates of calibration atmospher
272. stantial conformance with said published specifications provided that a Buyer shall promptly notify Seller in writing upon the discovery of any defect which notice shall include the product model and serial number if applicable and details of the warranty claim b after Seller s review Seller will provide Buyer with service data and or a Return Material Authorization RMA which may include biohazard decontamination procedures and other product specific handling instructions and c then if applicable Buyer may return the defective Products to Seller with all costs prepaid by Buyer Replacement parts may be new or refurbished at the election of Seller All replaced parts shall become the property of Seller Shipment to Buyer of repaired or replacement Products shall be made in accordance with the Delivery provisions of the Seller s Terms and Conditions of Sale Consumables including but not limited to lamps fuses batteries bulbs and other such expendable items are expressly excluded from the warranty under this warranty Notwithstanding the foregoing Products supplied by Seller that are obtained by Seller from an original manufacturer or third party supplier are not warranted by Seller but Seller agrees to assign to Buyer any warranty rights in such Product that Seller may have from the original manufacturer or third party supplier to the extent such assignment is allowed by such original manufacturer or third party suppli
273. status interface board status and I O Expansion board status if installed indicate that the power supplies are working and connections are successful There are no setting screens for these alarms e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Internal Temperature The Internal Temperature screen displays the current internal temperature 3 64 Model 42 Instruction Manual and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 8 to 47 C If the internal temperature reading goes beyond Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu either the minimum or maximum alarm limit an alarm is activated The word ALARM appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Internal Temp ERED CH perm Mi mh PSHE Py AG Lf bi Min and Max Internal The Minimum Internal Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change Temperature Limits the minimum internal temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum internal temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Internal Temp gt Min or Max WH ried Chamber Temperature The Chamber Temperature screen displays the current chamber temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 47 to 51 C If the chamber temperature reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated The word ALARM appears in the Run sc
274. t Channels to Full Scale oooooonnioninicnionancncnoo 7 30 Pressure Transducer Assembly Replacement coocnicninnnnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnss 7 31 Pressure Transducer Calibration ssssssessessssesesesrserrsrrrrerererrrsesreeses 7 32 Temperature Control Board Replacement oononnonnnnnnnnennnnncncnnnnnns 7 34 Ambient Temperature Calibration srl 7 35 F se Replacements argiren aaiae aE 7 36 Scrubber Replace eee einen ean nea 7 36 I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement cceeeeeseeteeeereeee 7 37 Digital Output Board Replacement innata tias 7 39 Motherboard Replacement ud iii ici 7 39 Measurement Interface Board Replacement oooicnocnnonnnncncnnncnccnnnnannno 7 40 Plow Transducer Replacement djs Ip 7 41 Flow Transducer Calibrations cent ads 7 42 Front Panel Board Replacement cocina iii 7 44 LCD Module Replacement api syachenderleeete nei eiuceecdeca taney 7 45 Service Locations ida Ad ct 7 46 System Description a 8 1 E AI an a 8 1 No NO Co Ra 8 2 Mode Solenoid veia tito 8 2 Reaction Chamber siii dis 8 2 Optical Filters a e a Leo 8 3 Pressure Transductores 8 3 Sample Flow Sensorial ida 8 3 OLA id 8 3 Ozonator Flower ia 8 3 Proton de e ates 8 3 Photomultiplier Tube Coolers hia sey Cite Catas ici 8 3 PU ni id 8 3 Sample Capillary comisaria 8 3 Dry Ai Capillary ero i a esinaise ias Eae 8 4 Software A AET n Seale 8 4 Instrument o A ete a e ENE 8 4 Model 42 Instruction Manual xi Contents Monitoring Signals ad ge tue diet
275. t Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Use DCHP Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 41 Operation Instrument Controls Menu IP Address The IP Address screen is used to edit the IP address The IP address can only be changed when DHCP is OFF For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP above e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt IP Address eal DH vided PIL i Netmask The Netmask screen is used to edit the netmask The netmask is used to determine the subnet for which the instrument can directly communicate to other devices on The netmask can only be changed when DHCP is OFF For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Netmask 3 42 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Default Gateway The Default Gateway screen is used to edit the gateway address The default gateway can only be changed when DHCP is OFF For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP above Any traffic to addresses that are not on the local subnet will be routed through this address e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Gateway Pr aT cA CH bo bei a Taic i i Host Name The host name screen
276. t format 01 ok Table B 9 Reply Termination Formats Format Reply Termination 00 lt CR gt 01 lt NL gt sum xxxx lt CR gt where xxxx 4 hexadecimal digits that represent the sum of all the characters bytes in the message host name This command reports the host name string Send host name Receive host name analyzero1 set host name string This command sets the host name string where string is 1 13 alphanumeric characters Send set host name analyzero1 Receive set host name analyzer01 ok instr name This command reports the instrument name Send instr name Receive instr name NO NO2 NOx Analyzer NO NO2 NOx Analyzer instrument id This command reports the instrument id Model 42i Instruction Manual B 41 C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration 1 0 Configuration B 42 Model 42 Instruction Manual Send instrument id Receive instrument id 42 set instrument id value This command sets the instrument id to value where value is a decimal number between 0 and 127 inclusive Note Sending this command via RS 232 or RS 485 will require the host to use the new id for subsequent commands A Send set instrument id 50 Receive set instrument id 50 ok mode This command reports what operating mode the instrument is in local service or remote The example below shows that the instrument is in the remote mode Send mode Receive mode remote set mode local set mode remote These commands set
277. t over a wide range of inlet ambient moisture levels A secondary benefit of the sample dryer option is its ability to remove ambient levels of ammonia NH3 from the sample stream The Model 427 is available with the following Lag Volume option The Model 42 is based on the principle that nitric oxide NO and ozone react to produce a characteristic luminescence with an intensity linearly proportional to the NO concentration Infrared light emission results when electronically excited NO molecules decay to lower energy states Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Lag Volume Specifically NO 0 gt NO 0 hu Nitrogen dioxide NO2 must first be transformed into NO before it can be measured using the chemiluminescent reaction NO is converted to NO by a molybdenum NO gt to NO converter heated to about 325 C 3 NO Mo gt 3 NO MoO The ambient air sample enters the Model 42 through an inline Teflon particulate filter through a flow control capillary and then splits between the NO and the NO channel In the NO channel the spilt sample is directed to the common port of the three way solenoid valve The sample is then routed either to the inlet tee of the reaction chamber or joins the exhaust of the reaction chamber In the NO channel the split sample is directed to the common port of a second three way solenoid valve after having passed through the NO converter and a lag volume
278. t records stored in memory B 23 no2 Reports current NO concentration B 10 no2 coef Reports sets current NO coefficient B 26 no2 gas Reports sets NO span gas concentration B 27 nox Reports current NO concentration B 10 nox bkg Reports sets current NO background B 28 nox coef Reports sets current NO coefficient B 26 Model 42 Instruction Manual B 7 C Link Protocol Commands Commands B 8 Model 42 Instruction Manual Command Description Page nox gas Reports sets NO span gas concentration B 27 ozonator Reports sets ozonator on or off B 37 ozonator flow Reports current ozonator flow B 37 ozonator safety Reports sets ozonator safety on or off B 37 ozonator status Reports status of ozonator and safety B 38 perm gas temp Reports current permeation gas temperature B 11 pmt status Reports sets PMT status on or off B 38 pmt temp Reports temperature of the PMT cooler same as cooler B 11 temperature pmt voltage Reports current PMT voltage B 11 pres Reports current reaction chamber pressure B 12 pres cal Reports sets pressure used for calibration B 28 pres comp Reports sets pressure compensation on or off B 35 program no Reports analyzer program number B 42 push Simulates pressing a key on the front panel B 29 range mode Reports sets current range mode B 33 range no Reports sets current NO range B 31 range no2 Reports sets current NO range B 31 range nox R
279. t the NO reading in the example below to zero use Cr to increment the NO background correction to 4 4 ppb As the NO background correction is increased the NO concentration is decreased Note that at this point pressing Jand however has no affect on the analog outputs or the stored NO background correction of 0 0 ppb A question mark following both the NO reading and the NO background correction indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To escape this screen without saving any changes press to return to the Calibration Factors menu or to return to the Run screen Press to actually set the NO reading to 0 ppb and store the new background correction of 4 4 ppb Then the question mark prompt beside the NO reading disappears Thermo Fisher Scientific NO NO and NO Thermo Fisher Scientific Coefficients Operation Calibration Factors Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt NO or NOx Bkg EN PUHE Eet Beee nr The NO NO and NOx span coefficient are usually calculated by the instrument processor during calibration The span coefficients are used to correct the NO NOs and NO readings The NO and NO span coefficients normally has a value near 1 000 The NO span coefficient normally has a value between 0 95 and 1 050 The NO NO and NO Coefficient screens allow the NO NO gt and NO span coefficients to be manually changed while sampling span gas of
280. tallation Installing the Model 427 includes the following recommendations and procedures e Lifting on page 2 1 e Unpacking and Inspection on page 2 1 e Setup Procedure on page 2 3 e Connecting External Devices on page 2 5 e Startup on page 2 9 When lifting the instrument use procedure appropriate to lifting a heavy object such as bending at the knees while keeping your back straight and upright Grasp the instrument at the bottom in the front and at the rear of the unit Although one person can lift the unit it is desirable to have two persons lifting one by grasping the bottom in the front and the other by grasping the bottom in the rear Equipment Damage Do not attempt to lift the instrument by the cover or other external fittings A The Model 42i is shipped complete in one container If there is obvious damage to the shipping container when you receive the instrument notify the carrier immediately and hold for inspection The carrier is responsible for any damage incurred during shipment Use the following procedure to unpack and inspect the instrument 1 Remove the instrument from its shipping container and set it on a table or bench that allows easy access to both the front and rear 2 Remove the cover to expose the internal components 3 Remove the packing material Figure 2 1 Model 42 Instruction Manual 2 1 Installation Unpacking and Inspection
281. te All channels are user definable If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration the default selections my not apply A Dual Range Mode In the dual range mode there are two independent analog outputs These are labeled simply as the High Range and the Low Range Each channel has its own analog output range averaging time and span coefficient This enables the sample concentration reading to be sent to the analog outputs at two different ranges For example the low NO analog output can be set to output concentrations from 0 to 50 ppb and the high NO analog output set to output concentrations from 0 to 500 ppb Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 9 Operation Range Menu In addition to each channel having two ranges each channel has two span coefficients There are two span coefficients so that each range can be calibrated separately This is necessary if the two ranges are not close to one another For example the low NO range is set to 0 50 ppb and the high NO range is set to 0 20 000 ppb By default in the dual range mode the analog outputs are arranged on the rear panel connector as shown in Figure 3 5 See Table 3 3 for channels and pin connections Dual range mode may be selected from the Range Mode Select on page 3 74 o000000000000000000 c000000000000000000 O Figure 3 5 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector in Dual Range Mode
282. teps 5 and 6 above When the analyzer responses stabilize record the resultant NO concentrations as NO rem From the Main Menu choose Calibration gt Cal NO2 Coefficient The NO line of the Calibrate NO screen displays the current NO concentration The SPAN CONC line of the display is where you enter the NO calibration gas concentration Set the NO calibration gas concentration to reflect the sum of the following the NO concentration generated by GPT NO onric NO rem and any NO impurity Use el to move the cursor left and right and use Ce to increment and decrement the numeric character at the cursor Fno X NO limp NO Jour INO Jora INO Trem 2 JOUT ORIG REM Beat Ros Fp Where NOpJour diluted NO concentration at the output manifold ppm Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific 11 Ls 13 14 Calibration Calibration NO oric original NO concentration prior to addition of Oz ppm NO rem NO concentration remaining after addition of Oz ppm Press to calculate and save the new NO coefficient based on the entered span concentration The analyzer does a one point NO span coefficient calculation corrects the NO reading for converter inefficiency and then adds the corrected NO to the NO signal to give a corrected NO signal If the analyzer calculates a NO span coefficient of less than 0 96 either the entered NO concentration is incorrect
283. ter is available as an option The I O expansion board provides six analog current output channels 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA and eight analog voltage inputs 0 10V The DB25 connector on the rear panel provides the interface for these inputs and outputs The optional terminal block and cable kits provide a convenient way to connect devices to the instrument These kits break out the signals on the rear panel connector to individual numbered terminals Two types of terminal block and cable kits are available One kit is for the DB37 connectors and can be used for either the analog output connector or the relay output connector The other kit is for the DB25 connector and can be used for the optional I O expansion board For associated part numbers refer to External Device Connection Components on page 7 6 Each kit consists of e one six foot cable e one terminal block e one snap track Note Supporting all of the connections on units with the optional I O expansion board requires e two DB37 kits e one DB25 kit Table 9 1 identifies the optional individual cables that are available for the instrument and Table 9 2 provides the cable color codes For associated part numbers refer to External Device Connection Components on page 7 6 Model 42 Instruction Manual 9 13 Optional Equipment Cables 9 14 Model 42 Instruction Manual Note Table 9 2 provides the color coding for both 25 pin cables and 37 pin cables Color
284. the analog outputs 1 Connect a meter to the channel to be tested Figure 7 15 shows the analog output pins and Table 7 4 identifies the associated channels Current Outputs Analog Voltage Inputs o Analog Voltage Outputs 26 Figure 7 15 Rear Panel Analog Input and Output Pins 2 From the Main Menu press _4_ to scroll to Diagnostics gt press gt to scroll to Test Analog Outputs and press e The Test Analog Outputs screen appears 3 Press 4 to scroll to the desired channel corresponding to the rear panel terminal pins where the meter is connected and press The Set Analog Outputs screen appears 4 Press to set the output to zero The Output Set To line displays Zero 5 Check that the meter is displaying the zero value If the meter reading differs by more than one percent the analog outputs should be Model 42i Instruction Manual 7 27 Servicing Analog Output Testing adjusted Refer to the Analog Output Calibration procedure that follows 6 Press Cr to set the output to full scale The Output Set To line displays Full Scale 7 Check that the meter is displaying a full scale value If the meter reading differs by more than one percent the analog outputs should be adjusted Refer to the Analog Output Calibration procedure that follows 8 Press to reset the analog outputs to normal Table 7 4 Analog Output Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections Voltage Pin
285. tific Safety Precautions Thermo Fisher Scientific A A Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance This chapter describes the periodic maintenance procedures that should be performed on the instrument to ensure proper operation Since usage and environmental conditions vary greatly you should inspect the components frequently until an appropriate maintenance schedule is determined This chapter includes the following maintenance information and replacement procedures e Safety Precautions on page 5 1 e Replacement Parts on page 5 2 e Cleaning the Outside Case on page 5 2 e Ozonator Air Feed Drying Column Replacement on page 5 2 e Capillaries Inspection and Replacement on page 5 2 e Thermoelectric Cooler Fins Inspection and Cleaning on page 5 4 e Fan Filters Inspection and Cleaning on page 5 4 e Pump Rebuilding on page 5 5 Read the safety precautions before beginning any procedures in this chapter WARNING If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired Do not attempt to lift the instrument by the cover or other external fittings A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing
286. tion alarm limit screens function the same way e In the Main Menu choose Alarms gt Select Concentration gt Min or Max 3 72 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Min Trigger The Minimum Trigger screen allows the user to view and set the NO NO and NO concentration alarm trigger type to either floor or ceiling The minimum alarm may be programmed as a floor trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration falls below the minimum value or a ceiling trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration goes above the minimum value e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Select Concentration gt Min Trigger Service Menu The Service menu appears only when the instrument is in the service mode To put the instrument into the service mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Service Mode Advanced diagnostic functions are included in the service mode Meaningful data should not be collected when the instrument is in the service mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 73 Operation Service Menu PMT Voltage Adjustment Range Mode Select 3 74 Model 42 Instruction Manual CH Guided PME kee EE i The PMT Voltage Adjustment screen is used to manually adjust the PMT supply voltage The PMT voltage adjustment screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on t
287. ue source is followed by optional alarm information indicated by a commercial at sign with a source indicator and a starting bit indicator All alarm information is presumed to be two bits long low and high The bitfield extraction is performed on the integer part of the source Typical alarm information would appear as 6 4 Then there appears an optional translation table within braces This is a string of words separated by spaces An example translation table would be Code_0 Code_1 Code_2 Code_3 The value once extracted is used as a zero based index into the translation table to determine the string to display Then there appears an optional selection table within parentheses This is a string of numbers separated by spaces 0 1 The selection table lists the translation table entries which the user may select from when setting the parameter This is not necessarily the same as the entries which may be displayed Then there appears an optional button designator This will be one of B T LT oa ee or N B Indicates a button which pops up an input dialog prompting the user for a new value using the designated input format The input format is specified from the B through the subsequent semicolon I Indicates a button which pops up a selection list with input translation That is the values read are translated before they are compared to the selection list options L Indicates a button which
288. ues to factory defaults e In the Main Menu choose Service gt Flow Calibration gt Set Defaults Input Board Calibration The Input Board Calibration menu is used to initiate a calibration of the input A D stages The input board calibration menu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Input Board Calibration BOMISE ua A oP TE iyi DN EEE TE oa EY hed Bast ade OE neat ii Manual Input Calibration The Manual Input Calibration screen is used to do a manual calibration of the input board A D stages per the following procedure Note The measurement system and the PMT are both shut off inside this screen A Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual 3 79 Operation Service Menu 1 In the Main Menu choose Service gt Input Board Calibration gt Manual Input Calibration 2 Press to leave warning screen 3 Make a note of the frequency at gain of 1 4 Use e jand gt to change the gain between 10 and 100 5 Use f Jandl Y to increment or decrement the D A counts so the frequency at gain 100 is equal to the frequency at gain 1 6 Press to save new input board calibration Automatic Input Calibration The Automatic Input Calibration screen is used to d
289. ur skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module A The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully A Model 42 Instruction Manual 7 45 Servicing Service Locations Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth it may easily scratch the plate A Do not use alcohol acetone MEK or other Ketone based or aromatic solvents to clean the LCD module use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases A Do not shake or jolt the LCD module A 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the ribbon cable and the two wire connector from the front panel board 3 Remove the four screws at the corners of the LCD module 4 Slide the LCD module out towards the right of the instrument 5 Replace the LCD module by following previous steps in reverse Service Locations For additional assistance service is available from exclusive distributors worldwide Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com aqi 1 866 282 0430 Toll Free 1 508 520 0430 Internationa
290. ut Status 11 15 Ox0A The status of outputs 2 10 is shown as the byte value 0xCD or binary 1100 1101 Output 10 is the MSB of this byte and output 2 is the LSB By convention bits within a byte are shown with the MSB to the left and the LSB to the right Thus the outputs in the first byte are 10 through 2 from left to right In the last data byte the status of outputs 15 11 is shown as the byte value 0x0A or binary 0000 1010 Output 15 is in the fifth bit position from the left and output 11 is the LSB of this byte The four remaining high order bits are zero filled Read holding input registers reads the measurement data from the instrument Issuing either of these function codes will generate the same response These functions read the contents of one or more contiguous registers These registers are 16 bits each and are organized as shown below All of the values are reported as 32 bit IEEE standard 754 floating point format This uses 2 sequential registers least significant 16 bits first The request specifies the starting register address and the number of registers Registers are addressed starting at zero Therefore registers numbered 1 16 are addressed as 0 15 The register data in the response message are packed as two bytes per register with the binary contents right justified within each byte For each register the first byte contains the high order bits and the second contains the low order bits Model 42 Instruct
291. volt mib This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the measurement interface board The sequence of voltages is Positive 24 positive 15 negative 15 positive 5 positive 3 3 and positive 15 Each voltage value is separated by a space Send diag volt mib Receive diag volt mib 24 1 14 9 14 9 4 9 3 2 14 9 diag volt iob This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the I O expansion board The sequence of voltages is Positive 24 positive 5 positive 3 3 and negative 3 3 Each voltage value is separated by a space Send diag volt iob Receive diag volt iob 24 1 4 9 3 2 3 2 clr records This command will clear all long and short records that have been saved Send clear records Receive clear records ok set clr lrecs set clr srecs Model 42 Instruction Manual B 17 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging B 18 Model 42 Instruction Manual These commands will clear only the long records or only the short records that have been saved The example below clears short records Send set clr srecs Receive set clr srecs ok data treatment lrec data treatment srec These commands report the current selection of data treatment for concentrations in the long records lrecs or short records srecs The example below reports the data treatment for concentrations in lrec is minimum Send data treatment lrec Receive data treatment lrec min set data treatment lrec string set data treatment
292. w range B 10 coefficients low no2 coef Reports sets low range NO coefficient B 26 low no2 gas Reports sets low range NO span gas concentration B 27 low nox Reports NO concentration calculated with low range B 10 coefficients low nox coef Reports sets low range NO coefficient B 26 low nox gas Reports sets low range NO span gas concentration B 27 low range no Reports sets current NO low range B 31 low range no2 Reports sets current NO low range B 31 low range nox Reports sets current NO low range B 31 Ir Outputs long records in the format specified in the command B 19 Irec Outputs long records B 20 Irec format Reports sets output format for long records ASCII or binary B 21 Irec layout Reports current layout of Irec data B 22 Irec mem size Reports maximum number of long records that can be stored B 22 Irec per Reports sets long record logging period B 22 malloc Irec Reports sets memory allocation for long records B 23 malloc srec Reports sets memory allocation for short records B 23 me menu Simulates pressing menu pushbutton B 29 meas mode Reports sets which measurement mode is active B 34 mode Reports operating mode in local service or remote B 42 no Reports current NO concentration B 10 no bkg Reports sets current NO background B 28 no coef Reports sets current NO coefficient B 26 no gas Reports sets NO span gas concentration B 27 no of Irec Reports sets number of long records stored in memory B 23 no of srec Reports sets number of shor
293. ween yes or no when selected and displayed if auto calibration is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Zero Span Check Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i Instruction Manual 3 23 Operation Calibration Menu ep guide Piet Next Time The Next Time screen is used to view and set the next zero span check date and time Once the initial zero span check is performed the date and time of the next zero span check is calculated and displayed e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Zero Span Check gt Next Time Period Hours The Zero Span Period Hours screen defines the period or interval between zero span checks Periods between 0 and 999 hours are acceptable To turn the zero span check off set the period to 0 e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Zero Span Check gt Period Hours 3 24 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Calibration Menu Zero Span Purge The Zero Duration Minutes screen defines how long zero air is sampled by Duration Minutes the instrument The span and purge duration screens look and function the same way as the zero duration screen and are used to set how long the span gas and sample gas are sampled by the instrument Durations between 0 and 60 minutes are acceptable Each time a zero span check occurs the zero check is done first followed by the span check To perform just a zero check set the span and purge duration screen to 0 off The
294. yed if the I O expansion board option is installed Configuration includes entering descriptor units decimal places choice of 1 10 points in the table and corresponding number of points selected e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config Thermo Fisher Scientific Wi mri Model 42 Instruction Manual 3 51 Operation Instrument Controls Menu E Mikeni i Descriptor The Descriptor screen allows the user to enter the descriptor for the selected analog input channel The descriptor is used in datalogging and streaming data to report what data is being sent out The descriptor may be from 1 to 3 characters in length and defaults to IN1 to IN8 user input channel number e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt Select Channel gt Descriptor Units The Units screen allows the user to enter the units for the selected analog input channel The units are displayed on the diagnostic screen and in datalogging and streaming data The units may be from 1 to 3 characters in length and defaults to V volts e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt Select Channel gt Units 3 52 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Decimal Places The Decimal Places screen allows the user to select how many
295. zonator Safety Dilution Ratio The Dilution Ratio screen allows the user to view and set the dilution ratio Acceptable values are 1 500 1 The default is 1 1 When this value is set the dilution ratio is applied to all concentration measurements This screen is only accessible if the dilution ratio option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Dilution Ratio Display Pixel Test The Display Pixel Test is used to test the LCD display The display pixel test is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Display Pixel Test 3 90 Model 42 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Password Menu POE ia Bs EEE TE oa ETET Aad ip keh i Bet f Restore User Defaults The Restore User Defaults screen is used to reset the user calibration and configuration values to factory defaults The restore user defaults screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Restore User Defaults Passwo rd Menu The Password menu allows the user to configure password protection If the instrument is locked none of the settings may be changed via the front panel user interface The items visible under the password

Model 42i - User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents